JP2019049748A - Liquid crystal display - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a liquid crystal display that can improve viewing angle characteristics, a method for driving the liquid crystal display, and an electronic apparatus provided with the liquid crystal display.SOLUTION: In a liquid crystal display performing display by obliquely aligning liquid crystal molecules or radially obliquely aligning liquid crystal molecules, one pixel is divided into a plurality of areas (sub pixels), and signals applied to the sub pixels are made different for every arbitrary period, or the signals applied to the sub pixels are made different for every adjacent pixels. The liquid crystal display improves viewing angle characteristics for a viewer by inclining the liquid crystal molecules to increase the number of directions for orientation, and improves the viewing angle characteristics by varying the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules for every arbitrary period as well.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to an article, a method, or a method of producing an article. In particular, the present invention relates to a display device or a semiconductor device. The invention further relates to a liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the present invention relates to a driving method of a liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the present invention relates to an electronic device provided with a display device.

Liquid crystal display devices are used in various electric products such as mobile phones and television receivers. In liquid crystal display devices, there is room for improvement in terms of contrast ratio, responsiveness of liquid crystal molecules to input signals (hereinafter referred to as high-speed responsiveness), and viewing angle characteristics, and therefore, research for further higher image quality is very important. It is active.

Therefore, in a liquid crystal display device, VA (Vertical) designed so that liquid crystal molecules are vertically aligned to a substrate sandwiching the liquid crystal molecules in order to enhance the responsiveness (hereinafter referred to as high speed response) of liquid crystal molecules to input signals. Research on display technology of Alignment (vertical alignment type) liquid crystal (hereinafter referred to simply as VA type) has been advanced. In the VA mode, there is room for improvement in the viewing angle characteristics, and in recent years, an MVA (Multi-domain) is designed in which protruding portions are provided in electrode portions sandwiching liquid crystal molecules and liquid crystal molecules are inclined or radial inclined.
Vertical Alignment) Liquid Crystal, PVA (Patterned Ver
(tical alignment) type liquid crystal, ASV (Advanced Super V)
Research is being conducted on a display technology called an iew) type liquid crystal (hereinafter, simply referred to as an MVA system, a PVA system, or an ASV system).

In the MVA method, PVA method, and ASV method, the viewing angle characteristics at the time of image display are improved by aligning liquid crystal molecules in a tilted alignment or a radial tilt alignment, but many places where the liquid crystal molecules align can be formed. . Therefore, it is difficult to control the alignment of the liquid crystal, and there is a problem that the visibility in the front of the liquid crystal display and the visibility in the side become uneven, and the image quality is lowered. Therefore, one pixel (pixel) is divided into a plurality of regions (sub-pixels, sub-pixels, or sub-pixels: hereinafter referred to as sub-pixels), and the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in different directions to increase the orientation. Research on display technology is being advanced to improve the viewing angle characteristics of the user (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1).

JP, 2006-209135, A

SID'05 DIGEST, 66.1, pp 1842, (2005)

Unlike a display device using a Braun tube or a self-luminous display element, a liquid crystal display device transmits light from a backlight or the like through a polarizing layer and a liquid crystal layer and changes the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer. Control the amount of transmission for display. Therefore, the viewing angle characteristics of the liquid crystal element do not match the viewing angle characteristics of a display device using a Braun tube or a self-luminous display element which directly controls the light emission amount by applying a voltage to the display element, and there is room for improvement. There is. In the liquid crystal display devices of Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved. However, simply as described in Patent Document 1, increasing the orientation of liquid crystal molecules to improve the viewing angle characteristics by increasing the number of sub-pixels reduces the aperture ratio of the pixel and the aperture ratio. This leads to an increase in power consumption.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics, a method of driving the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus equipped with the liquid crystal display device. An object of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving the image quality, a method of driving the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic device equipped with the liquid crystal display device. In addition, according to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the density at which the wirings and the electrodes constituting the pixel are arranged without increasing the number of sub-pixels, and a liquid crystal display device capable of improving the aperture ratio of the pixel and the liquid crystal An object is to provide a driving method of a display device and an electronic device including the liquid crystal display device. Then, a liquid crystal display device capable of reducing a reduction in aperture ratio and reducing power consumption by increasing the number of sub-pixels, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic device including the liquid crystal display device The task is to provide.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventors came to the idea that in a liquid crystal display device, one pixel is divided into sub-pixels, and signals to be applied to each sub-pixel are made different every arbitrary period. Further, the inventors arrived at the idea that in a liquid crystal display device, one pixel is divided into sub-pixels, and the signal applied to each sub-pixel is made different for each adjacent pixel. Alternatively, in the liquid crystal display device, the present inventors divide one pixel into sub-pixels, make a signal applied to each sub-pixel different every arbitrary period, and an adjacent pixel a signal applied to each sub-pixel It also led to the idea of making it different every time. As a result, in addition to the improvement of the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by increasing the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to improve the viewing angle characteristics by the change of the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules for each arbitrary period. I assume.

Note that the number of sub-pixels included in one pixel is preferably one or more. More preferably, it is 2 or 3. When the number of sub-pixels included in one pixel is 1, that is, when one pixel is not divided into sub-pixels, an arbitrary period (for example, one frame period) is divided into a plurality of periods (for example, plural subframe periods It is desirable to divide the signal into two, and to make the applied signal different for each divided period. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that various types of switches can be used as the switch. Examples include electrical switches and mechanical switches. That is, it is not limited to a specific one as long as the flow of current can be controlled. For example, as a switch, a transistor (eg, a bipolar transistor, a MOS transistor, etc.), a diode (eg, a PN diode,
PIN diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator)
Metal) Diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semicon)
A diode, a diode connected transistor, etc.), a thyristor, etc. can be used. Alternatively, a logic circuit combining these can be used as a switch.

When a transistor is used as a switch, the transistor operates as a mere switch, and thus the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, in order to suppress the off current, it is preferable to use a transistor with a smaller off current. As a transistor having a small off current, there are a transistor having an LDD region, a transistor having a multi gate structure, and the like. Alternatively, an N-channel transistor is preferably used in the case where the potential of the source terminal of the transistor operated as a switch is close to the potential of the low potential power supply (Vss, GND, 0 V, etc.). On the other hand, it is desirable to use a P-channel transistor when operating with the potential of the source terminal close to the potential of the high potential side power supply (such as Vdd). This is because, in an N-channel transistor, when the source terminal operates near the potential of the low potential power supply, in a P-channel transistor, when the source terminal operates near the potential of the high power supply, the gate and source Because the absolute value of the voltage between them can be increased, it is easy to operate as a switch. In addition, since the source follower operation is less likely to occur, the magnitude of the output voltage is less likely to decrease.

Note that CMO can be formed using both N-channel and P-channel transistors.
An S-type switch may be used as a switch. In the case of a CMOS switch, when either a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor is turned on, a current flows, so that the switch can easily function. For example, even when the voltage of the input signal to the switch is high or low, the voltage can be output appropriately. Furthermore, since the voltage amplitude value of the signal for turning on or off the switch can be reduced, power consumption can also be reduced.

Note that in the case of using a transistor as a switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of a source terminal or a drain terminal) and an output terminal (the other of the source terminal or the drain terminal),
And a terminal (gate terminal) for controlling conduction. On the other hand, when a diode is used as a switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling conduction. Therefore, when a diode is used as a switch rather than a transistor, the number of wirings for controlling terminals can be reduced.

In the case where it is explicitly stated that A and B are connected, the case where A and B are electrically connected and the case where A and B are functionally connected , A and B are directly connected. Here, A and B each denote an object (eg, a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, a layer, or the like). Therefore, the present invention is not limited to a predetermined connection relation, for example, the connection relation shown in the figure or the sentence, and includes other than the connection relation shown in the figure or the sentence.

For example, in the case where A and B are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, a diode, or the like) which can electrically connect A and B is used. , And A and B may be disposed one or more. Alternatively, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (for example, an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, or the like) that enables functional connection of A and B as a case where A and B are functionally connected, a signal conversion circuit (DA converter circuit, AD converter circuit, gamma correction circuit etc.), potential level converter circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step down circuit etc.), level shifter circuit to change the potential level of signal etc.) voltage source, current source, switching circuit , Amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase the signal amplitude or current amount, etc., operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, memory circuits,
One or more control circuits may be disposed between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are directly connected, A and B may be directly connected without sandwiching another element or another circuit between A and B.

In the case where it is explicitly stated that A and B are directly connected, when A and B are directly connected (that is, another element or another circuit between A and B) And A and B are electrically connected (that is, A and B are connected via another element or another circuit). And (if applicable).

In the case where it is explicitly stated that A and B are electrically connected, when A and B are electrically connected (that is, another element between A and B) And when A and B are functionally connected (that is, functionally connected between A and B with another circuit). And when A and B are directly connected (if
That is, the case where A and B are connected without sandwiching another element or another circuit) is included. That is, when explicitly described as being electrically connected, it is assumed that it is the same as the case where only being connected is explicitly described.

Note that a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light emitting element, and a light emitting device which is a device having a light emitting element can have various modes and can have various elements. For example, as a display element, a display device, a light emitting element or a light emitting device, an EL element (an EL element containing an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, an electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, Grating light valve (GLV), plasma display (P
DP), a digital micro mirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, a carbon nanotube, or the like, and a display medium in which the contrast, the brightness, the reflectance, the transmittance, and the like change by electromagnetic action can be used. In addition, an EL display is a display using an EL element, and a field emission display (FED) or an SED flat display (SED: Surface-c) is a display using an electron emitting element.
Liquid crystal displays (transmissive liquid crystal display, semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, reflective liquid crystal display, direct view liquid crystal display, projection liquid crystal display), electronic ink, and the like as display devices using liquid crystal elements such as onduction electron-emitter disply) As a display device using an electrophoretic element, there is electronic paper.

Note that various types of transistors can be used as the transistor. Therefore,
There is no limitation on the type of transistor used. For example, a thin film transistor (TFT) having a non-single crystal semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as microcrystalline or semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used. There are various advantages when using a TFT. For example, since manufacturing can be performed at a lower temperature than in the case of single crystal silicon, manufacturing cost can be reduced or the manufacturing apparatus can be enlarged. Since the manufacturing apparatus can be enlarged, it can be manufactured on a large substrate. Therefore, a large number of display devices can be manufactured at the same time, so manufacturing can be performed at low cost. Furthermore, since the manufacturing temperature is low, a substrate with low heat resistance can be used. Therefore, the transistor can be manufactured on a transparent substrate. Then, transmission of light in the display element can be controlled by using a transistor on a transparent substrate.
Alternatively, since the thickness of the transistor is thin, part of a film included in the transistor can transmit light. Therefore, the aperture ratio can be improved.

By using a catalyst (such as nickel) when producing polycrystalline silicon,
It is possible to further improve the crystallinity and manufacture a transistor with good electrical characteristics. As a result, a gate driver circuit (scanning line driving circuit), a source driver circuit (signal line driving circuit), and a signal processing circuit (signal generating circuit, gamma correction circuit, DA conversion circuit, etc.) can be integrally formed on a substrate. .

By using a catalyst (such as nickel) when producing microcrystalline silicon,
It is possible to further improve the crystallinity and manufacture a transistor with good electrical characteristics. At this time, crystallinity can be improved only by heat treatment without performing laser irradiation. As a result, the gate driver circuit (scanning line driver circuit) and part of the source driver circuit (such as an analog switch) can be integrally formed on the substrate. Furthermore, in the case where laser irradiation is not performed for crystallization, unevenness in crystallinity of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, a beautiful image can be displayed.

However, polycrystalline silicon or microcrystalline silicon can be manufactured without using a catalyst (such as nickel).

Although it is desirable to improve the crystallinity of silicon to polycrystals or microcrystals for the whole panel, it is not limited thereto. The crystallinity of silicon may be improved only in a partial region of the panel. It is possible to selectively improve the crystallinity by selectively irradiating a laser beam or the like. For example, the laser light may be irradiated only to the peripheral circuit area which is an area other than the pixel. Alternatively, laser light may be emitted only to regions such as a gate driver circuit and a source driver circuit. Alternatively, laser light may be emitted only to the area of a part of the source driver circuit (for example, an analog switch). as a result,
The crystallization of silicon can be improved only in areas where the circuit needs to operate at high speed. Since the pixel region is not required to operate at high speed, the pixel circuit can be operated without any problem even if the crystallinity is not improved. Therefore, the region for improving the crystallinity can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be shortened. In addition, the throughput can be improved and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the number of manufacturing apparatuses required can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, the transistor can be formed using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like.
Accordingly, it is possible to manufacture a transistor with a small size, a high variation in current supply capability, and a small variation in characteristics, size, and shape. When these transistors are used, power consumption of the circuit can be reduced or integration of the circuit can be increased.

Or ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, ITO, SnO
A transistor having a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor such as, or a thin film transistor in which the compound semiconductor or the oxide semiconductor is thinned can be used.
By these, the manufacturing temperature can be lowered and, for example, the transistor can be manufactured at room temperature. As a result, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate with low heat resistance, such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. Note that these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used not only for the channel portion of the transistor but also for other uses. For example, these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used as a resistor, a pixel electrode, and a transparent electrode. Furthermore, since they can be deposited or formed at the same time as transistors, cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor or the like formed using an inkjet method or a printing method can be used. They can be manufactured at room temperature, manufactured at low vacuum, or manufactured on a large substrate. In addition, since the transistor can be manufactured without using a mask (reticle), the layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to use a resist, the material cost can be reduced and the number of processes can be reduced. Furthermore, since the film is applied only to the necessary portions, the material is not wasted and the cost can be reduced compared to the manufacturing method in which the film is formed on the entire surface and then etched.

Alternatively, a transistor or the like including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can be used. Thus, the transistor can be formed over a bendable substrate. Therefore, it can withstand shocks.

Furthermore, transistors with various structures can be used. For example, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as the transistor. By using a MOS transistor, the size of the transistor can be reduced. Therefore, a large number of transistors can be mounted. A large current can flow by using a bipolar transistor. Thus, the circuit can be operated at high speed.

Note that MOS transistors, bipolar transistors, and the like may be mixed on one substrate. Thus, low power consumption, downsizing, high speed operation, and the like can be realized.

  Other various transistors can be used.

Note that the transistor can be formed using various substrates. The type of substrate is
It is not limited to a specific one. As the substrate, for example, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fiber A leather substrate, a rubber substrate, a stainless steel still substrate, a substrate having a stainless steel foil, etc. can be used (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or regenerated fiber (acetate, cupra, rayon, regenerated polyester etc.), etc. . Or skin of animal such as human (skin surface, dermis)
Alternatively, subcutaneous tissue may be used as a substrate. Alternatively, one substrate may be used to form a transistor, and then, the transistor may be transposed to another substrate and the transistor may be disposed on another substrate. As a substrate on which the transistor is transposed, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate,
Quartz substrate, plastic substrate, paper substrate, cellophane substrate, stone substrate, wood substrate, cloth substrate (
Natural fibers (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fibers (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or regenerated fibers (acetate, cupra, rayon, regenerated polyester, etc.), leather substrate, rubber substrate, stainless steel substrate, stainless steel, stainless steel A substrate having a still foil can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of animals such as humans may be used as a substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and the substrate may be polished and thinned. As a substrate to be polished, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fiber A leather substrate, a rubber substrate, a stainless steel still substrate, a substrate having a stainless steel foil, etc. can be used (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or regenerated fiber (acetate, cupra, rayon, regenerated polyester etc.), etc. . Alternatively, the skin (skin, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of animals such as humans may be used as a substrate. By using these substrates, formation of a transistor with good characteristics, formation of a transistor with low power consumption, manufacture of a device that is not easily broken, provision of heat resistance, weight reduction, or thickness reduction can be achieved.

Note that the configuration of the transistor can take various forms. It is not limited to a specific configuration. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. In the multi-gate structure, the channel regions are connected in series, so that a plurality of transistors are connected in series. With the multi-gate structure, the off current can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Alternatively, due to the multi-gate structure, when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change so much even when the drain-source voltage changes, and the slope of the voltage-current characteristics becomes flat. it can. By utilizing the flat slope of the voltage / current characteristics, it is possible to realize an ideal current source circuit or an active load having a very high resistance value. As a result, a differential circuit or current mirror circuit with good characteristics can be realized. In addition, gate electrodes may be disposed above and below the channel. With the structure in which the gate electrodes are disposed above and below the channel, the channel region is increased, and therefore, the S value can be reduced by increasing the current value or forming a depletion layer easily. When gate electrodes are disposed above and below the channel, a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel.

Alternatively, the gate electrode may be disposed above the channel region, or the gate electrode may be disposed below the channel region. Alternatively, a positive stagger structure or a reverse stagger structure may be used, the channel region may be divided into a plurality of regions, the channel regions may be connected in parallel, or the channel regions may be connected in series. Good. In addition, the source electrode or the drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or a part thereof). With a structure in which the source electrode and the drain electrode overlap with the channel region (or a part thereof), charge can be prevented from being accumulated in part of the channel region to prevent the operation from becoming unstable. Further, an LDD region may be provided. By providing the LDD region, the off current can be reduced or the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or
By providing the LDD region, the drain-source current does not change so much even when the drain-source voltage changes when operating in the saturation region, and the slope of the voltage-current characteristics can be made flat. it can.

Note that various types of transistors can be used and the transistors can be formed using various substrates. Therefore, all of the circuits necessary to realize a predetermined function may be formed on the same substrate. For example, all the circuits necessary for achieving a predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystal substrate, or an SOI substrate, and are formed using various substrates. It is also good. Since all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function are formed using the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connections with circuit parts. Can be Alternatively, a part of the circuit necessary to realize a predetermined function is formed on one substrate, and another part of the circuit necessary to realize a predetermined function is formed on another substrate. It may be That is, all the circuits necessary to realize a predetermined function may not be formed using the same substrate. For example, part of a circuit necessary for achieving a predetermined function is formed using a transistor on a glass substrate, and another part of the circuit necessary for achieving a predetermined function is a single crystal substrate An IC chip formed of a transistor formed using a single crystal substrate may be connected to a glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass), and the IC chip may be disposed over the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed substrate. Thus, by forming a part of the circuit on the same substrate, it is possible to reduce the cost by reducing the number of components or to improve the reliability by reducing the number of connections with circuit components. In addition, circuits with high drive voltage and high drive frequency consume more power, so circuits in such parts are not formed on the same substrate, and instead, for example, on a single crystal substrate By forming a circuit of that portion and using an IC chip configured with that circuit, it is possible to prevent an increase in power consumption.

Note that one pixel represents one element capable of controlling the brightness. Therefore, as an example, one pixel represents one color element, and one color element represents brightness.
Therefore, in this case, in the case of a color display device consisting of R (red) G (green) B (blue) color elements, the minimum unit of the image is: R pixels, G pixels and B pixels. It shall be composed of three pixels. The color elements are not limited to three colors, and three or more colors may be used, or colors other than RGB may be used. For example, white may be added to make RGBW (W is white). Also, R
For example, one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta, emerald green, vermilion, etc. may be added to GB. Also, for example, a color similar to at least one color of RGB may be
May be added to For example, R, G, B1 and B2 may be used. Both B1 and B2 are blue but have slightly different frequencies. Similarly, R1, R2, G, and B may be used. By using such color elements, it is possible to perform display closer to the real thing. Alternatively, power consumption can be reduced by using such color elements. Also,
As another example, when using a plurality of regions to control brightness for one color element,
One area may be one pixel. Therefore, as an example, when performing area gradation or having sub-pixels (sub-pixels), there is a plurality of areas for controlling the brightness for one color element, and the gradation is represented in its entirety. However, one pixel of the area for controlling the brightness may be set as one pixel. Therefore, in this case, one color element is composed of a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, even if there are a plurality of regions for controlling the brightness in one color element, they may be put together and one color element may be one pixel. Therefore, in this case, one color element is composed of one pixel. Further, when brightness is controlled using a plurality of areas for one color element, the size of the area contributing to display may differ depending on the pixel. In addition, in a plurality of brightness control areas for one color element, the viewing angle may be expanded by slightly different signals supplied to each. In other words, 1
The potentials of pixel electrodes included in each of a plurality of regions of one color element may be different from one another. As a result, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal molecules differs depending on each pixel electrode. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.

In the case where one pixel (for three colors) is explicitly described, it is assumed that three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. In the case of explicitly describing one pixel (one color), when there are a plurality of regions for one color element, it is assumed that they are collectively considered as one pixel.

The pixels may be arranged (arranged) in a matrix. Here, that the pixels are arranged (arranged) in a matrix includes the case where the pixels are arranged in a straight line or in a jagged line in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Therefore, for example, when performing full-color display with three color elements (for example, RGB), the case where stripes are arranged or the case where dots of three color elements are arranged delta is also included. Furthermore, it includes the case where it is arranged in Bayer. The color elements are not limited to three colors, and may be more than three colors, for example, RGBW (W is white), or one obtained by adding one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta, etc. to RGB. In addition, the size of the display area may be different for each dot of the color element. Accordingly, power consumption can be reduced or the lifetime of the display element can be lengthened.

Note that an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.

In the active matrix method, not only transistors but also various active elements (active elements, non-linear elements) can be used as active elements (active elements, non-linear elements). For example, MIM (Metal Insulator Metal) or TFD
It is also possible to use Thin Film Diode) or the like. Since these elements have few manufacturing steps, the manufacturing cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Furthermore, since the size of the element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, and power consumption and brightness can be reduced.

In addition to the active matrix method, it is also possible to use a passive matrix type which does not use an active element (active element, non-linear element). Since no active element (active element, non-linear element) is used, the number of manufacturing steps is reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. In addition, since an active element (an active element or a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, and power consumption and brightness can be reduced.

Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source, and has a channel region between the drain region and the source region, and the drain region, the channel region, and the source region The current can flow through the Here, since the source and the drain change depending on the structure, the operating condition, and the like of the transistor, it is difficult to define which is the source or the drain. Therefore, in this document (specification, claims, drawings, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be referred to as a source or a drain. In that case, as an example, each may be described as a 1st terminal and a 2nd terminal. Alternatively, each may be referred to as a first electrode and a second electrode. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a source region and a drain region.

Note that the transistor may be an element having at least three terminals including a base, an emitter, and a collector. Also in this case, the emitter and the collector may be described as a first terminal and a second terminal.

Note that a gate refers to the whole or a part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like). The gate electrode means a conductive film in a portion overlapping with a semiconductor forming a channel region via a gate insulating film. Note that part of the gate electrode is an LDD (Lightly Do
In some cases, the gate insulating film is overlapped with the ped drain region or the source region (or drain region). The gate wiring refers to a wiring for connecting between gate electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting between gate electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting a gate electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, portions (regions, etc.) which also function as gate electrodes and also function as gate wirings.
There are also conductive films, wires, etc.). Such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or may be called a gate wiring. That is, there is also a region where the gate electrode and the gate wiring can not be clearly distinguished. For example, in the case where a part of the gate wiring which is extended and arranged overlaps with the channel region, that part (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) functions as a gate wiring. It will be working. Thus, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed using the same material as the gate electrode and in which the same island (island) as the gate electrode is formed may be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed using the same material as the gate wiring and in which the same island (island) as the gate wiring is formed may be called a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may not overlap with the channel region or may not have a function of connecting to another gate electrode. However, due to the specifications at the time of manufacturing, etc., it is formed of the same material as the gate electrode or the gate wiring, and a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) connected by forming the same island as the gate electrode ). Therefore, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may also be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

For example, in a multi-gate transistor, one gate electrode and another gate electrode are often connected by a conductive film formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wire, etc.) is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wire, etc.) for connecting the gate electrode and the gate electrode, and may be called a gate wire. Since the transistor in the above can be regarded as one transistor, it may be called a gate electrode. That is, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed using the same material as the gate electrode or the gate wiring and which forms the same island as the gate electrode or the gate wiring (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) You may call me. Furthermore, for example, a conductive film of a portion connecting the gate electrode and the gate wiring, and formed of a material different from the gate electrode or the gate wiring may also be called a gate electrode, or the gate wiring You may call it.

Note that a gate terminal refers to part of a gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) or a portion electrically connected to the gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like). .

Note that in the case where a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, or the like is referred to, the gate of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scan line, and the scan signal line are formed at the same time as a wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material as the gate of the transistor, or the gate of the transistor It may mean a deposited film. Examples include a storage capacitance wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

The source means a source region, a source electrode and a source wiring (a source line, a source signal line,
The whole or part of them including data lines, data signal lines, and the like). The source region refers to a semiconductor region containing a large amount of P-type impurities (such as boron and gallium) and N-type impurities (such as phosphorus and arsenic). Therefore, a region containing a small amount of P-type impurities or N-type impurities, that is, a so-called lightly doped drain (LDD) region is not included in the source region. The source electrode is formed of a material different from the source region,
It refers to a conductive layer in a portion electrically connected to a source region. However, the source electrode may also be referred to as a source electrode including the source region. A source wiring is a wiring for connecting between source electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting between source electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting a source electrode and another wiring. Say.

However, a portion that also functions as a source electrode and also functions as a source wiring (
There are also regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.). Such parts (areas, conductive films, wires, etc.)
It may be called a source electrode or may be called a source wiring. That is, there is also a region where the source electrode and the source wiring can not be clearly distinguished. For example, in the case where a part of the source wiring which is extended and arranged overlaps with the source region, the part (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) functions as a source wiring, but as a source electrode Is also working. Therefore, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called a source electrode or may be called a source wiring.

Note that a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed using the same material as the source electrode and forms the same island (island) as the source electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) , A conductive film, a wiring, and the like) may also be referred to as a source electrode. Furthermore, a portion overlapping with the source region may also be called a source electrode. Similarly, a region which is formed of the same material as the source wiring and in which the same island (island) as the source wiring is formed and connected may be referred to as a source wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode. However, there are portions (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, and the like) which are formed of the same material as the source electrode or the source wiring and are connected to the source electrode or the source wiring due to specifications in manufacturing. Therefore, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may also be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that, for example, a conductive film in a portion connecting a source electrode and a source wiring and formed of a material different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may also be called a source electrode, or the source wiring You may call it.

Note that a source terminal refers to part of a region of a source region, a source electrode, and a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) electrically connected to the source electrode.

Note that in the case where a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like is referred to, the source (drain) of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. in this case,
For the source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, and the data signal line, a wiring formed in the same layer as the source (drain) of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material as the source (drain) of the transistor It may mean a wiring formed simultaneously with the source (drain). Examples include a storage capacitance wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

  The drain is the same as the source.

Note that a semiconductor device refers to a device including a circuit including a semiconductor element (eg, a transistor, a diode, or a thyristor). Furthermore, any device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics may be called a semiconductor device. Alternatively, a device including a semiconductor material is referred to as a semiconductor device.

In addition, with a display element, an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light emitting element, EL element (organic EL element,
Inorganic EL elements or EL elements containing organic substances and inorganic substances), electron emitting elements, electrophoretic elements, discharging elements, light reflecting elements, light diffraction elements, digital micro mirror devices (DMD), and the like. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that a display device refers to a device having a display element. Note that the display device may include a plurality of pixels including a display element. Note that the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit that drives a plurality of pixels. Note that the peripheral driver circuit for driving the plurality of pixels may be formed on the same substrate as the plurality of pixels. The display device is a peripheral drive circuit disposed on a substrate by wire bonding, bumps, etc., so-called chip-on-glass (COG).
It may include an IC chip connected by or an IC chip connected by TAB or the like. Note that the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. Note that
The display device may include a printed wiring board (PWB) which is connected via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or the like and to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. The display device may include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. Note that the display device is a lighting device, a housing, an audio input / output device,
A light sensor or the like may be included. Here, a lighting device such as a backlight unit is
A light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflection sheet, a light source (LED, cold cathode tube etc.), a cooling device (water-cooled type, air-cooled type), etc. may be included.

Note that a lighting device refers to a device including a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (such as an LED, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube), a cooling device, and the like.

Note that a light-emitting device refers to a device including a light-emitting element or the like. In the case where a light emitting element is included as the display element, the light emitting device is one of the specific examples of the display device.

Note that a reflection device refers to a device having a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a light reflection electrode, and the like.

Note that a liquid crystal display device refers to a display device including a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display device
There are direct view type, projection type, transmission type, reflection type, semi-transmission type and the like.

Note that a driver refers to a device including a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, and an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor that controls input of a signal from a source signal line into a pixel (sometimes referred to as a selection transistor, a switching transistor, or the like), a transistor that supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode, or voltage or current to a light-emitting element The transistor that supplies the voltage is an example of the driving device. Furthermore, a circuit that supplies a signal to a gate signal line (sometimes called a gate driver or a gate line driver circuit) or a circuit that supplies a signal to a source signal line (such as a source driver or a source line driver circuit) And the like are examples of the drive device.

Note that a display device, a semiconductor device, a lighting device, a cooling device, a light-emitting device, a reflection device, a driver, and the like may overlap with each other. For example, the display device may include a semiconductor device and a light emitting device. Alternatively, the semiconductor device may include a display device and a driver.

When it is explicitly stated that B is formed on A or B is formed on A, it is limited to B being formed in direct contact with A. I will not. It also includes the case where there is no direct contact, that is, when another object intervenes between A and B. Here, A and B each represent an object (for example, a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, a layer,
Etc.).

Thus, for example, layer B is formed directly on top of layer A if it is explicitly stated that layer B is formed on (or on) layer A. The case where another layer (for example, layer C, layer D, etc.) is formed directly in contact with the top of layer A, and the layer B is formed directly in contact with it is included. Note that another layer (eg, layer C, layer D, etc.) may be a single layer or multiple layers.

Furthermore, the same applies to the case where it is explicitly stated that B is formed above A, and it is not limited to the fact that B is in direct contact with A, but between A and B. Also includes the case where another object intervenes. Thus, for example, in the case where the layer B is formed above the layer A, the case where the layer B is formed directly on the layer A, and another layer directly on the layer A This includes the case where (for example, layer C, layer D, etc.) is formed, and layer B is formed on and in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (eg, layer C, layer D, etc.) may be a single layer or multiple layers.

In addition, when stated explicitly that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes the case where B is formed in direct contact with A, and another between A and B It does not include when an object intervenes.

  The same applies to the case where B is below A or B is below A.

In addition, about what is explicitly described as singular, it is desirable that it is singular.
However, it is not limited to this, It is also possible to be plural. Similarly, it is desirable that a plurality be explicitly stated as a plurality. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and may be singular.

According to the present invention, in addition to the improvement of the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by tilting the liquid crystal molecules and increasing the orientation, it is possible to improve the viewing angle characteristics due to the fluctuation of the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules for each frame. As a result, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics, a method of driving the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus equipped with the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the present invention, in addition to the improvement of the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by increasing the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted and oriented, the viewing angle characteristics utilizing the illusion of vision by the variation of the transmittance of liquid crystal molecules for each adjacent pixel. Can be improved. As a result, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics, a method of driving the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus equipped with the liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 1 shows a liquid crystal display device of the present invention. The figure for demonstrating a look-up table. The figure for demonstrating the display part of this invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram for describing a configuration of a pixel of a display portion. The figure for demonstrating the orientation of the liquid crystal molecule in this invention. The figure which shows the timing chart for demonstrating this invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. The figure for demonstrating a look-up table. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between gradation and luminance for explaining the present invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating a look-up table. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the example of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. However, it will be readily understood by those skilled in the art that the present invention can be practiced in many different ways and that various changes in form and detail can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Be done. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to the description of the present embodiment. In the drawings of the present specification, the same portions or portions having similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Embodiment 1

First of all, the basic principle of the present invention will be described in detail.

In the display portion of the display device, a plurality of pixels are arranged, and as one example, are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. In FIG. 75, the display portion 7501 is provided with a plurality of pixels 7504 connected to the scan line 7502 and the signal line 7503. One pixel (below, 1
A pixel has one or more plural regions (also referred to as a sub pixel, a sub pixel, or a sub pixel, hereinafter referred to as a sub pixel). As one example, as shown in FIG. 75, one pixel includes a first sub-pixel (sub-pixel A7504A) and a second sub-pixel (sub-pixel B7504B).

One pixel expresses the gradation of one pixel by the total of the transmission amount of light of each of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. That is, assuming that the transmission amount of light according to the number of gradations expressed by one pixel is X, the transmission amount X is the transmission amount XA of light in sub-pixel A and the transmission amount XB of light in sub-pixel B It becomes a sum. Then, the transmission amount X is controlled by the sum of the transmission amount XA of the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount XB of the sub-pixel B, and the gradation of one pixel is expressed.

Note that the transmission amount of light in the pixel or the sub-pixel may be the luminance of the pixel or the sub-pixel. In addition, the reflection amount of light of the pixel or the sub-pixel may be used. Alternatively, it may be the sum of the light transmission amount of the pixel or the sub-pixel and the reflection amount of the light of the pixel or the sub-pixel.

As to the specific light transmission amount of one pixel and the light transmission amounts of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, as shown in FIG.
An example is given to (a) and it demonstrates. In FIG. 76 (a), the sub-pixel A for the gradation in one pixel is
Of the light transmission 7702 of the sub-pixel B, and a total value 7703 of the light transmission of one pixel. For example, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the transmission amount of light in one pixel is 5, the transmission amount of light in sub pixel A is 2 and the transmission amount of light in sub pixel B is 3 Thus, the total value is 5, and the transmission amount of light in one pixel can be set to 5.
In addition, when the transmission amount of light in one pixel is 10, the transmission amount of light in the sub pixel A is 4 and the transmission amount of light in the sub pixel B is 6, so that the total value is 10. 1 amount of light transmission at 1 pixel
It can be 0. As described above, by changing the transmission amounts of light of the plurality of sub-pixels according to the transmission amount of light of one pixel, it is possible to appropriately express gradation.

At this time, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules can be made different between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.
As an example, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the liquid crystal molecules of the sub-pixel A are inclined at θA and aligned, and as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the liquid crystal molecules of the sub-pixel B are inclined at θB and aligned. Therefore, when the viewing direction of the viewer is changed with respect to the display portion (also referred to as a screen) through which light is transmitted, the amount of change in gradation recognized and actually displayed is reduced. Can. Therefore, the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

As described above, it is possible to widen the viewing angle by dividing the gradation expression of one pixel into sub-pixels, but when the amount of light transmission in a certain pixel is determined, the light in sub-pixel A If the amount of transmission of light and the amount of light transmission at the sub-pixel B are fixed, the gradation changes when the screen is viewed from a specific direction.

Therefore, in view of the change in gradation described above, in the configuration described in this embodiment, when the light transmission amount in a certain pixel is determined, the light transmission amount in the sub pixel A and the light transmission in the sub pixel B It is intended to prevent the amount and the amount from being fixed. By setting the transmission amount of light in the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount of light in the sub-pixel B not to be fixed, the gradation changes when the screen is viewed from a specific direction. It can be further reduced.

In the configuration described in this embodiment, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel, the light transmission amount XA in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB in the sub-pixel B take a plurality of combinations. Focusing on what can be done, it came up with an idea. That is, a plurality of combinations of the transmission amount of light in the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount of light in the sub-pixel B are used to determine the transmission amount of light in one pixel. As a result, it is possible to reduce the change in gradation when the screen is viewed from a specific direction without fixing the transmission amount of light in each sub-pixel which determines the transmission amount of light in one pixel. .

For example, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 1 in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB = 4 in the sub-pixel B. Alternatively, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 0 in the sub pixel A and the light transmission amount XB in the sub pixel B = 5. Alternatively, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 3 in the sub pixel A and the light transmission amount XB in the sub pixel B = 2. That is, when the light transmission amount of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is expressed as (XA, XB), when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, (0, 5), (1, 4) , (2, 3
Multiple combinations can be taken, such as), (3, 2), etc. In addition, transmission amount XA
The total of the light transmission amount XB and the light transmission amount XB is the light transmission amount X.

As a specific configuration, in order to obtain a desired gradation, a combination of a plurality of (XA, XB) is used when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is required. For example, in a certain period (hereinafter, referred to as a first period), (XA1, XB1) is set, and in another period (hereinafter, a second period), (XA2, XB2) is set. As a result, in the total period including the first period and the second period, the amount of transmitted light is averaged by the first period and the second period, and the screen is viewed from a specific direction. Also, it is possible to reduce the change in gradation.

In the above description, the light transmission amount X of one pixel, the light transmission amount XA of the sub pixel A, and the sub pixel B
The relationship of the light transmission amount XB of X is described as X = XA + XB, but is not limited thereto. The sum of XA and XB should be approximately coincident with X. The amount of transmission of X, XA, and XB changes somewhat depending on the viewing direction, and therefore, a difference may occur between the sum of XA and XB and X. However, there is no problem as long as there is no problem such as flickering or not appearing as normal gradation in human eyes. The variation of the sum of XA and XB with respect to X may be approximately 10% or so, more preferably 5% or so.

Next, a configuration using a parameter different from the light transmission amount will be described, and the relationship between the other parameter and the light transmission amount will be described. That is, an example of controlling the gradation by controlling the transmission amount of light of one pixel using a parameter different from the transmission amount of light will be described.

As an example, the area SA of the light transmission area in the sub pixel A, the area SB of the light transmission area in the sub pixel B, the light transmission amount TA per unit area and unit time in the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B
It is assumed that the transmission area TB of light per unit area and unit time in the unit area, the transmission time of light in the sub pixel A is PA, and the transmission time of light in the sub pixel B is PB. When the transmission amount XA of light of the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount XB of light of the sub-pixel B are described using the above parameters, XA = SA × TA × P
The relationship A and XB = SB × TB × PB holds. Therefore, the area of the light transmission region,
Regarding parameters such as the amount of light transmission per unit area and unit time, and the transmission time of light,
At least one parameter can be controlled to control the amount of light transmission.

Note that the light transmission region in the pixel or the sub-pixel may be a light emission region of the pixel or the sub-pixel, or a light reflection region of the pixel or the sub-pixel. Further, the light transmission area in the pixel or the sub-pixel may be the sum of the light transmission area of the pixel or the sub-pixel and the reflection area of the light of the pixel or the sub-pixel. In addition, the transmission amount of light per unit area and unit time in a pixel or sub-pixel is the light emission luminance per unit time of the pixel or sub-pixel, or the reflection amount of light per unit time of the pixel or sub-pixel It is also good. In addition, the light transmission amount per unit area and unit time in the pixel or sub pixel is the light transmission amount per unit area and unit time in the pixel or sub pixel, and the unit area and unit in the pixel or sub pixel It may be the sum of the reflection amount of light per time. In addition, the light transmission time of the pixel or the sub-pixel may be the light emission time of the pixel or the sub-pixel, or the reflection time of the light of the pixel or the sub-pixel. Also,
The light transmission time at the pixel or sub-pixel may be the sum of the light transmission time of the pixel or sub-pixel and the light reflection time of the pixel or sub-pixel.

In addition, the light transmission amount TA, TB per unit area and unit time in each sub-pixel can be controlled by the gradation signal added to the sub-pixel. Therefore, when the gradation signal in the sub pixel A is EA, the transmission amount TA of light per unit area and unit time is obtained, and in the case of the gradation signal EB in the sub pixel B, the light of unit area and per unit time is The permeation amount can be TB.

Further, the light transmission amount TA, TB per unit area and unit time in each sub-pixel can be determined by the signal applied to the actual display element in accordance with the gradation signal. As an example, in the case of the liquid crystal element, in the case of the gradation signal EA in the sub pixel A, the gradation voltage VA applied to the pixel electrode of the sub pixel A has a gamma corrected value according to the characteristics of the liquid crystal element. There is. In addition, since the liquid crystal element is AC-driven, a voltage for the positive electrode and a voltage for the negative electrode are required. Assuming that the potential of the common electrode is 0 V, the gradation voltage VA for the positive electrode and the gradation voltage -VA for the negative electrode are applied to the pixel electrode. As a result, it is possible to control the transmission amount XA by controlling the transmission amount TA per unit area and per unit time. The same applies to the sub-pixel B.

Note that the gradation voltage is a value in consideration of the area of the transmission region of the sub-pixel, the transmission time of light, the luminance of a backlight or the like, and the like. For example, the area of the light transmission region is the sub-pixel A:
When the sub-pixel B = 1: 2, even though the light transmission amount (XA, XB) is (2, 4), the same gradation voltage is applied to the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. It will be supplied. This is because, even with the same gradation voltage, the area of the transmission region is different, and as a result, the transmission amount of light is also different.

Although the case where the potential of the common electrode is assumed to be 0 V has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the potential of the common electrode is other than 0 V, the gray scale voltages for the positive and negative electrodes are also shifted accordingly. Further, even when the potential of the common electrode is 0 V, the absolute value of the gray scale voltage for the positive electrode and the gray scale voltage for the negative electrode are not necessarily equal. Due to the influence of noise or the like, a difference may occur between the gradation voltage for the positive electrode and the gradation voltage for the negative electrode.

In the case of a display device using a liquid crystal element, light is emitted from a backlight, a front light, or the like, and the rate of transmitting light is controlled by the liquid crystal element. That is, it can be said that the transmittance of light is controlled by the liquid crystal element. Therefore, the unit area and the transmission amount per unit time, the transmission amount, and the like can be controlled using the intensity of light irradiated by a backlight, a front light, or the like, and the light transmittance of the liquid crystal element.

As mentioned above, various parameters can be used to control the amount of light transmission. Of the above-described parameters, which parameter to control can be arbitrarily determined. The parameters are not limited to the parameters such as the area of the light transmission area described above, the unit area and the light transmission amount per unit time, and the light transmission time, and any parameter that can control the light transmission amount , Various parameters can be used.

Then, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is required, a plurality of combinations of parameters according to the light transmission amount in each sub-pixel are used. The amount of transmission of light is controlled by parameters such as the area of the transmission area, the amount of transmission of light per unit area and unit time, the transmission time of light, gradation signal, gradation voltage, transmittance, and brightness such as backlight. Therefore, at least one parameter is selected from these parameters. Then, in the parameter, a plurality of combinations of values are used to control the transmission amount X of light in one pixel. It is desirable that one parameter is used to control the amount of light transmission because it is easy to control. However, it is not limited to this,
A plurality of parameters may be used to combine them.

For example, when there are the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, the gradation signal EA of the sub pixel A, the transmission time PA of the sub pixel A, the gradation signal EB of the sub pixel B, and the transmission time PB of the sub pixel B as parameters The light transmission amount X may be controlled by preparing a plurality of sets of values (EA, PA, EB, PB) using. Alternatively, using the gradation signal EA of the sub pixel A and the gradation signal EB of the sub pixel B as parameters, using a plurality of sets of values (EA, EB), the light transmission amount X
May be controlled. Further, the same can be applied to the case where the number of sub-pixels constituting one pixel is other than two.

Note that the transmission amount of light, the area of the transmission region of light, the transmission amount of light per unit area and per unit time, the transmission time of light, gradation signal, gradation voltage, transmittance, luminance of backlight, etc. It may be an analog quantity or a digital quantity. When gamma correction is performed in the display device and AC driving of the liquid crystal element is considered, it is desirable that the gradation voltage be an analog amount. on the other hand,
When the gradation signal does not have information on gamma correction or AC driving of the liquid crystal element, it is desirable that the gradation signal be a digital quantity signal (hereinafter referred to as a digital signal). In the case of a digital signal, it is desirable that the gradation signal be a digital signal because signal holding and signal processing can be easily performed. Therefore, it is desirable that at first, it is a digital signal and be converted into an analog signal (hereinafter referred to as an analog signal) immediately before applying the signal to the liquid crystal element of the display portion. When such digital-to-analog conversion is performed, information regarding gamma correction and AC driving of the liquid crystal element is added, whereby efficient input of a grayscale signal to the display portion can be performed.

In addition, when the transmission amount X of light in one pixel is required, for example, when there are the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, the transmission amount XA of light of the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount of light of the sub-pixel B When the combination of XB (XA, XB) is used, each of the plurality of combinations of (XA, XB) may be prepared in advance as data, or may be created by calculating at any time, etc. Some may be prepared in advance, and some may be created by calculation.

In the case of using a plurality of (XA, XB) combinations, it is not particularly limited in which order or period the data of the combinations are used. For example, multiple (XA, XB
The combination of 2) may be prepared in advance as data in the storage unit, or may be created by arithmetic processing of a plurality of (XA, XB) combinations by the operation unit as needed. Alternatively, some of the combinations of (XA, XB) may be prepared in advance in the storage unit, and some of the combinations may be calculated by the calculation unit.

In the case where data of a plurality of (XA, XB) combinations are prepared in the storage unit in advance, for example, when the transmission amount of light X in one pixel is 5, the combination of
Assuming that four combinations of 0, 5), (1, 4), (2, 3), and (3, 2) are used, four data may be prepared. When preparing data, the data may be stored as a look up table (LUT) in the storage unit. That is, when the transmission amount is X, data corresponding to (XA, XB) is stored as a look-up table, and the data is read as needed with reference to the look-up table. May be used.

When data is stored in the storage unit as a look-up table, the transmission amount, the area of the transmission region, the transmission amount of light per unit area and unit time, the transmission time of light, the gradation signal, the gradation voltage, It can be stored for various parameters such as transmittance and brightness of backlight etc. However, in general, at the stage of designing a display device, the specifications of the look-up table stored in the storage unit may already be determined. Therefore, parameters that do not contribute to actual display need not be stored in the storage unit as a lookup table.

When data of a plurality of combinations (XA, XB) are stored in the storage unit as the look-up table, it is desirable to use the plurality of combinations (XA, XB) in order. Thus, data can be used throughout, and the viewing angle can be broadened. For example, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, the sum of (0, 5), (1, 4), (2, 3), (3, 2) as a combination of (XA, XB) If four combinations of data are stored as a lookup table, (0, 5), (1, 4), (2
, 3) and (3, 2) are used in this order. When the combination (3, 2) ends, the process returns to the combination (0, 5) and is repeated similarly.

However, the way of using the combination data (hereinafter referred to as combination data) for controlling the transmission amount X of light in one pixel described above is not particularly limited. Data on what order to use the combined data may be stored in advance in the storage together with the look-up table. Then, data relating to the order of combination data can be read out from the storage unit and used. The combined data may be used in random order. In the case of using combination data in a random order, when selecting data from a look-up table, random numbers may be generated and combination data according to the random numbers may be used.

Next, a gradation signal (hereinafter also referred to as a sub-gradation signal), which has a plurality of sub-pixels in one pixel and controls the light transmission amount for each sub-pixel, stores data in a lookup table A specific configuration example of the case will be described.

FIG. 1 shows a configuration example of a block diagram of a liquid crystal display device. The liquid crystal display device shown in FIG.
A gradation data conversion unit 101, a drive unit 102, a display unit 103, and a gradation data storage unit 104 are included.

In FIG. 1, the gradation data 100 is input to the gradation data storage unit 104. The gradation data storage unit 104 selects one of the gradation data storage units 1 according to the number of gradations of the input gradation signal 100.
Refer to the lookup table stored in 04. Then, the gradation data storage unit 104 outputs the combination data 106 based on the look-up table to the gradation data conversion unit 101. The gradation data conversion unit 101 generates the sub gradation signal 10 based on the combination data 106.
5 is output to the drive unit 102. Further, a control signal 107 for controlling display of the display unit 103 is input to the drive unit 102. The drive unit 102 outputs a signal for performing display on the display unit 103 based on the plurality of sub gray level signals 105 and the control signal 107. The drive unit 102 also has a function of performing D / A conversion, gamma correction, and polarity inversion of a signal output to the display unit 103.

The sub gradation signal 105 corresponds to image data (moving image, still image, etc.) supplied to each pixel of the display unit 103. Further, as described above, each pixel of the display unit 103 has a plurality of sub-pixels, and the sub gray level signal 105 is a signal for controlling the gray level of each sub pixel. The control signal 107 is a signal serving as a reference, such as a clock pulse and a start pulse, for driving the drive unit 102.

The gradation signal 100 is preferably a digital signal. Since the gradation signal 100 is a digital signal, conversion to the combination data 106 based on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 can be easily performed by the gradation data storage unit 104. Alternatively, the gradation signal 100 can be easily held. Alternatively, the sub gray level signal 105 output from the gray level data converter 101 to the driver 102 is preferably a digital signal. Sub gradation signal 10
Since 5 is a digital signal, it is possible to transfer an accurate signal that is not susceptible to noise. Then, in the drive unit 102, the digital signal is converted into an analog signal on which gamma correction, adjustment of polarity (selection of positive signal or negative signal), and the like are performed. Then, the analog signal is supplied to the pixel of the display unit 103.

Although the configuration of the block diagram of the liquid crystal display device described in FIG. 1 has been described as an example in the case where the gradation signal 100 is a digital signal, the present invention is not limited to this. When the gray scale signal 100 is an analog signal, as shown in FIG. 57, an A / D conversion circuit 5701 is provided on the gray scale signal input side of the gray scale data conversion unit 101 to appropriately set the gray scale signal 100 of the analog signal. It may be converted into a digital signal 5702 of an arbitrary number of bits. In addition, when a sub gray scale signal of an analog signal is output to the drive unit 102, as shown in FIG. 58, the D / A conversion circuit 5801 is provided on the side to which the sub gray scale signal of the drive unit 102 is input. The sub gradation signal of the digital signal may be converted into an analog signal 5802 and output to the driving unit 102. In this case, D
In many cases, gamma correction, adjustment of polarity (selection of positive signal or negative signal), and the like are performed in the / A conversion circuit 5801. Therefore, in the drive unit 102, such functions are often omitted. When an analog signal is supplied to the drive unit 102, the configuration of the drive unit 102 can be simplified, so that the display unit 103 and the drive unit 102 can be formed on the same substrate. As a result, it is possible to realize narrowing of the frame, improvement of the reliability, and reduction of the number of parts.

Although an analog signal is often supplied to the display unit 103 as the sub gray level signal 105, the present invention is not limited to this. A digital signal may be supplied to the display portion 103 as a gray scale signal, and display may be performed using a time gray scale method, an area gray scale method, or the like.

The combination data 106 corresponding to the gradation signal 100 is read from the gradation data storage unit 104 by the gradation data conversion unit 101. In the present embodiment, the number of gradations of the gradation signal is n gradations (n is a natural number including 0). The gradation data storage unit 104 will be described below on the assumption that the combination data 106 corresponding to the number of gradations is stored as a look-up table. The combination data 106 is output from the gradation data storage unit 104 with reference to the look-up table based on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100. The look-up table is an arrangement of data in which the transmission amount of light represented by the sub gradation signal 105 output from the gradation data conversion unit 101 corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is estimated in advance. It is.

The look-up table has combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100. Then, in any of different periods, any one combination data is selected from the plurality of combination data, and combination data 106 corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is output to the gradation data conversion unit 101.

Further, the lookup table has a plurality of combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal 100 respectively. In FIG. 2, the look-up table stored in the gradation data storage unit 104 is schematically shown. In this embodiment, the first combination data is output as the combination data 106 to the gradation data conversion unit 101 in the first period, and the second combination data is combined with the gradation data conversion unit 101 in the second period. It is output as data 106. As described above, even if the combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal 100, the combination data from the first combination data and the combination data from the second combination data have sub-steps of different voltages. The tone signal conversion unit 101 generates the adjustment signal 105.

Further, the display portion in the display device described in this embodiment includes a plurality of pixels, and in each of the plurality of pixels, one pixel includes a sub-pixel. Each of the sub-pixels has a liquid crystal element. The sub gray scale signal 105 is supplied to the liquid crystal element of each of the sub pixels. Normally, different gray scale voltages are supplied to each sub-pixel to widen the viewing angle.
The transmittance of light by the liquid crystal element is controlled. However, it is not limited to this. A gray scale voltage of the same magnitude may be supplied to any of the sub-pixels. In each of the plurality of pixels, the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer are improved by tilting the liquid crystal molecules in another direction for each sub-pixel and increasing the orientation, and the display device performs the display based on the image data. ing. In this embodiment, one pixel is described as having a first sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel A) and a second sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel B).

The look-up table shown in FIG. 2 includes sub-gradation signals (referred to as first sub-gradation signals or sub-gradation signals A: hereinafter referred to as
And second combination data 201 corresponding to a sub-gradation signal (referred to as a second sub-gradation signal or sub-gradation signal B: hereinafter referred to as a sub-gradation signal B) to be input. Further, it has second combination data 202 corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. In FIG. 2, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is 0, the first combination data 201 is
As the combination data (a0, b0) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B.
, And as the second combination data 202, the sub gray scale signal A and the sub gray
Is referred to the combination data (c0, d0) corresponding to. Similarly, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is 1 to (n-1), the first combination data 201 is combination data (a1, a1 corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B). b1) to (a (n)
-1) and b (n-1)), the second combination data 202 includes combination data (c1, d1) to (c (n)) corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. -1),
Reference is made to d (n-1)).

Although the example of the look-up table shown in FIG. 2 describes the case where two types of combination data are provided for a certain gradation, the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, although the case has been described where the number of types of combination data is the same for all gradation numbers, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100, the number of types of combination data may be different. For example, in the number of gradations where the change in gradation when the screen is viewed from a specific direction is large, more combination data may be included in the look-up table. By this, it is possible to reduce the gradation shift when the screen is viewed from a specific direction, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics.

The liquid crystal element included in each of the sub-pixels shown above has two electrodes, for example, 2
When the potential difference between two electrodes is 0 V (hereinafter also referred to as voltage stop or voltage stop),
The case where the transmittance is 0% (hereinafter, also referred to as normally black) is described. Note that this embodiment is not limited to this. For the liquid crystal element, an element which has a transmittance of 100% (hereinafter, also referred to as normally white) when the voltage is stopped may be used.

Here, the operation of each block shown in FIG. 1 and the combination data of the look-up table will be described using a specific example. Note that the pixels of the display unit 103 are divided into two sub-pixels, for example, sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B, and the area of the light transmission region in each pixel of the display unit 103 is It is assumed that the sub-pixel B is equal. First, for example, the display unit 103
When six gradations are displayed, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (138) as the gradation signal 100. Then, the gradation signal 100 having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit 101 in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to two sub-pixels are stored as a look-up table. For example, it is assumed that two sets of combination data of (50, 88) and (90, 48) are stored. The sum of combination data of each sub-pixel is
It is the same in each combination data. That is, 50 + 88 = 138, 9
It is 0 + 48 = 138. Then, the first set (50, 88) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101, and is selected by the gradation data conversion unit 101 as combination data 106. It is input. Then, the gradation data conversion unit 101 outputs (50) as the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub pixel A and (88) as the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub pixel B to the drive unit 102. The driving unit 102 appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals 105, and inputs the signal to the display unit 103. In each sub-pixel of the display unit 103,
Light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of 0) and (88), and display is performed such that the gradation number becomes (138) as one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, the gradation signal 100 having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit 101 again as the gradation signal 100. Here, as an example,
Even if the frame period changes, the same gradation is displayed. Then, according to the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101, the second set (90, 48) is selected from the look-up table, and the gradation data conversion unit 101 is selected as the combination data 106.
Is input to Then, from the gradation data conversion unit 101, the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub pixel A
As the sub gray level signal 105 of the sub pixel B, (48) is output to the drive unit 102 as (90). The driving unit 102 performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of signals, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals 105, and inputs the signals to the display unit 103. Display unit 103
In each of the sub-pixels, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (90) and (48), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (138) as one pixel.

As described above, although display of the same number of gradations as in the previous frame period is performed as one pixel, the transmission amount in each sub-pixel is different from that in the previous frame. is there. Therefore, the alignment state of liquid crystal molecules in each sub-pixel can be made different for each frame period. Therefore, when the screen of the display unit 103 is viewed from a specific direction, the transmission amount of light is averaged, so that the viewing angle can be widened.

In the next frame period, the first pair (50, 88) is again selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101.

When the area of the transmissive region is different between each sub-pixel, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, when combining data is stored in advance in the look-up table, it may be stored in the combining data already taken into consideration. When generating the gray scale voltage from the adjustment signal, the sub gray scale signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

Note that as the gradation data storage unit 104, RAM (Random Access Mem) is used.
ory), ROM (Read Only Memory), etc. can be used. In addition, as RAM, SRAM (Static RAM), DRAM (Dynamic)
RAM), VRAM (Video RAM), DPRAM (Dual Port RAM)
), NOVRAM (Non Volatile RAM), PRAM (Pseudo R)
AM), FERAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Me
mory), etc. can be used. As ROM, EPROM (Elec
trically programmable read only memory),
One-time programmable ROM, EEPROM (Electrically Erased
and programmable Read Only Memory),
A flash memory, a mask ROM or the like can be used.

In addition, in the pixel of the display portion 103, a constant voltage (also referred to as a common electrode) is applied to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element, and the sub gray scale signal 105 is applied to the second electrode (also referred to as a pixel electrode). The transmittance of the liquid crystal element is controlled by applying a gray scale voltage (hereinafter, referred to as a sub gray scale voltage) generated by the drive unit 102. The display device described in this embodiment applies a constant voltage to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element, and applies different sub-grayscale voltages to the respective sub-pixels even in the display based on the same image data to the second electrode. Thus, an example of controlling the light transmittance of the liquid crystal element is described. Specifically, even if the display device described in this embodiment is a display based on the same image data, in the first period and the second period, the second sub-pixel is used as the second sub-pixel.
By applying different sub gray scale voltages to the electrodes, the amount of light transmission (the total transmittance of the liquid crystal element) in the first period and the second period is controlled. In addition, a gradation voltage generated based on the sub gradation signal A is referred to as a sub gradation voltage A (or referred to as a first sub
Alternatively, a gray scale voltage generated based on the second sub gray scale voltage is called a sub gray scale voltage B.

Since the sub gray scale voltage generated by the drive unit 102 based on the sub gray scale signal 105 is converted to a signal applied to an electrode for controlling liquid crystal molecules of the sub pixel and used, the sub gray scale signal 1
It is written differently from 05. However, the sub gray scale voltage corresponds to the sub gray scale signal because it is obtained by gamma correction and polarity inversion of the sub gray scale signal 105 to be input to the sub pixel. Therefore, in the present specification, a sub gray scale voltage is referred to as a signal applied to an electrode for controlling liquid crystal molecules of a sub pixel, and a sub gray scale signal is referred to as a signal for controlling light transmittance of the sub pixel. Do.

Next, the configuration and operation of the display unit 103 shown in FIG. 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration and operation of the drive unit 102 will also be briefly described.

FIG. 3 illustrates the configuration of the drive unit 102 and the display unit 103 included in the display device used in the present invention. The driving unit 102 includes a source driver 301, a gate driver 302, and the like. In the display unit 103, a plurality of pixels 305 are arranged in a matrix.

In FIG. 3, the gate driver 302 supplies scan signals to the plurality of wirings 304, respectively. The scanning signal determines whether the pixels 305 are in the selected state or the non-selected state for each row. In addition, the gate driver 302 supplies a scan signal so that the pixels 305 are sequentially selected from the first row of the plurality of wirings 304. Further, the source driver 301 is configured to input a sub gray level signal A to be input to the sub pixel A in the pixel 305 through the wiring 303 selected by the scanning signal
The sub gray-scale signal B to be input to the sub-pixel B in the pixel is supplied to the wiring 313. The sub gradation signal is sequentially supplied to the pixel 305 in the selected state.

Regarding an example of the configuration of the source driver 301 and the gate driver 302 shown in FIG.
This will be described using FIG. 22 and FIG.

First, the configuration of the source driver 301 will be described with reference to FIG. The source driver 301 in FIG. 22 includes a shift register 2201, a level shifter 2202, a sampling circuit 2203, and the like.

The shift register 2201 is supplied with a source driver start pulse (SSP), a source driver clock signal (SCK), an inverted source driver clock signal (SCKB), and the like. Then, the shift register 2201 selects the sampling circuits 2203 one by one via the level shifter 2202.

The level shifter 2202 supplies the shift register 2201 to the sampling circuit 2203.
Level shift the selection signal from Then, the level shifter 2202 outputs the level shifted selection signal to the sampling circuit 2203.

To the input terminal of the sampling circuit 2203, the output terminal of the shift register 1501, the wiring to which the sub gradation signal A is input, and the wiring to which the sub gradation signal B is input are connected. The output terminals of the sampling circuit 2203 are connected to the wirings S (A1) to S (An) and S (B1) to S (
Bn) (n is a natural number) are connected to each other.

The sampling circuit 2203 sequentially samples the first sub gray scale signal and the second sub gray scale signal according to the output signal of the shift register 1501. In FIG. 22, two wirings, the wiring to which the first sub gray scale signal is input and the wiring to which the second sub gray scale signal is input, are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is In addition, although an example in which sub-pixel signals are supplied to the pixels of the display portion by point-sequential driving in FIG. 22 has been described, a latch circuit is provided,
Each pixel of the display portion may be driven by line sequential drive.

Although not shown in FIG. 22, the source driver 301 is a D / A conversion circuit for D / A converting the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B output to the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. , A gamma correction circuit for performing gamma correction, and a circuit for inverting the polarity.

The configuration of the gate driver will be described with reference to FIG. Gate driver 3 of FIG.
02 is composed of a shift register 2301, a level shifter 2302, a buffer circuit 2303, and the like.

The shift register 2201 is supplied with a gate driver start pulse (GSP), a gate driver clock signal (GCK), an inverted gate driver clock signal (GCKB), and the like. Then, shift register 2301 includes level shifter 2302 and buffer circuit 2.
Wirings connected to the pixels are selected one by one via 303.

The level shifter 2302 level shifts the scanning signal from the shift register 2301 supplied to the buffer circuit 2303. Then, the level shifter 2302 outputs the level-shifted scanning signal to the buffer circuit 2303.

Buffer circuit 2303 has shift register 2 level shifted by level shifter 2302.
The drive capability of the scan signal 301 is increased. By increasing the drive capability of the scan signal by the buffer circuit 2303, the delay time of the signal due to the resistance of the wiring for scanning the pixel can be improved.

In the display unit 103 in FIG. 3, as described above, the plurality of pixels 305 are arranged on the matrix. Note that the pixels 305 do not necessarily have to be arranged on the matrix, and the pixels 305 may be delta-arranged or Bayer-arranged. In addition, the wirings 303, the wirings 313, and the wirings 304 are connected to the plurality of pixels 505, respectively. Further, as a display method in the display portion 103, either a progressive method or an interlace method can be used. Note that by supplying signals to a plurality of pixels and performing display using an interlace method, a driving frequency can be reduced and power consumption can be reduced.

Next, with regard to the configuration of the pixel 305 disposed in the display unit 103 in FIG.
And will be described with reference to FIG.

First, FIG. 4A shows the configuration of the pixel 305. The pixel of this embodiment is a first pixel 30.
5 has a sub-pixel A400 and a sub-pixel B410. The sub pixel A is a switch 401,
A capacitor element 402 having two electrodes and a liquid crystal element 403 having two electrodes are included.
The first terminal of the switch 401 is connected to the wiring 303, and the second terminal is connected to the capacitor 402 and the liquid crystal element 403. The switch 401 is controlled by the wiring 304 to be either on or off. Further, the sub-pixel B includes a switch 411, a capacitor 412 having two electrodes, and a liquid crystal element 413 having two electrodes. The first switch 411
The terminal is connected to the wiring 313, and the second terminal is connected to the capacitor 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. The switch 411 is controlled by the wiring 304 to be either on or off.

A configuration different from the configuration of the pixel 305 shown in FIG. 4A is shown in FIG. 4B.
The pixel 305 shown in FIG. 4B is similar to FIG. 4A in the sub-pixel A400 and the sub-pixel B41.
It has 0. In addition, the sub-pixel A includes a switch 401, a capacitive element 402 having two electrodes,
And a liquid crystal element 403 having two electrodes. The first terminal of the switch 401 is the wiring 3
The second terminal is connected to the capacitor 402 and the liquid crystal element 403. The switch 401 is controlled to be either on or off by the wire 304A. Further, the sub-pixel B includes a switch 411, a capacitor 412 having two electrodes, and a liquid crystal element 413 having two electrodes. The first terminal of the switch 411 is connected to the wiring 303, and the second terminal is connected to the capacitor 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. The switch 411 is controlled to be on or off by the wiring 304B. Fig. 4 (a) and Fig. 4 (b)
The difference is in whether there are a plurality of wires for controlling the switches or a plurality of wires for supplying the sub gray-scale voltage, and this embodiment is applicable to any configuration. Therefore, below,
In the present embodiment, FIG. 4A will be described.

Note that as a liquid crystal mode of the liquid crystal element 403 and the liquid crystal element 413, TN mode, STN mode, IPS mode, VA mode, ferroelectric liquid crystal mode, antiferroelectric liquid crystal mode, OCB mode, or the like can be applied.

Note that an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor can be used as the switch 401 and the switch 411. In the case where an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor is used as the switch 401, the gate of the transistor is connected to the wiring 304, the first terminal is connected to the wiring 303, and the second terminal is the capacitor 402 and the liquid crystal element 403.
To be connected to In the case where an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor is used as the switch 411, the gate of the transistor is connected to the wiring 304, the first terminal is connected to the wiring 313, and the second terminal is the capacitor 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. To be connected to

Subsequently, basic operations relating to the first sub-pixel 400 and the second sub-pixel 410 constituting the pixel 305 disposed in the display unit 103 in FIG. 3 will be described. When the pixel 305 is in the selected state, the switch 401 is turned on, and the sub gray scale voltage A 501 supplied to the liquid crystal element 403 of the first sub-pixel 400 becomes the capacitive element 402 and the liquid crystal element 403 through the wiring 303.
Supplied to At this time, the capacitive element 402 has a sub gray scale voltage A5 applied to the liquid crystal element 403.
Hold 01. At the same time, when the pixel 305 is in the selected state, the switch 411 is turned on, and the sub gray scale voltage B 502 supplied to the liquid crystal element 413 of the second sub
The voltage is supplied to the capacitor element 412 and the liquid crystal element 413 through the reference numeral 13. At this time, the capacitive element 41
2 holds the sub gray scale voltage B 502 applied to the liquid crystal element 413.

In addition, when the pixel 305 is in the non-selected state, the switch 401 is turned off to set the sub gray scale voltage A5.
01 and the sub gray scale voltage B 502 are not supplied to the pixel 305. Here, the capacitive element 40
2 and the capacitor 412 hold the sub gray scale voltage A 501 and the sub gray scale voltage B 502 applied to the liquid crystal element 403 and the liquid crystal element 413, respectively. Therefore, the liquid crystal element 403
In the liquid crystal element 413, the application of the sub gray scale voltage A501 and the sub gray scale voltage B502 is maintained.

Furthermore, operations relating to the sub-pixel A 400 and the sub-pixel B 410 constituting the pixel 305 arranged in the display unit 103 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Note that in the case where n-channel transistors are used as the switch 401 and the switch 411, the scan signal is H level when the pixel 305 is in the selected state and is L level when the pixel 305 is in the non-selected state. Note that in the case where P-channel transistors are used as the switch 401 and the switch 411,
The scan signal is at L level when the pixel 305 is in the selected state, and at H level when the pixel 305 is in the non-selected state. FIG. 5 illustrates the control of the switch 401 and the switch 411 in the first period and the second period with switch ON or switch OFF.
Further, FIG. 5 shows the sub gray scale voltage A501 input to the pixel electrode of the first sub pixel in the first period and the second period, and the sub gray scale voltage input to the pixel electrode of the second sub pixel. B50
It is illustrated about the change of the electric potential of 2, and the time change of the gradation of a pixel. The potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage A in the first period is An, and the potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage B in the first period is Bn. Further, the potential to the common potential of the sub gray scale voltage A in the second period is Cn, and the potential to the common potential of the sub gray scale voltage B in the second period is Dn
In this case, gradation n (n is a natural number including 0) is displayed. Further, in FIG. 5, the common potential is represented as Vcom. Note that the aforementioned potential An, potential Bn, potential Cn,
And the potential Dn are different from each other.

In the liquid crystal element, the amount of light transmission is determined according to the potential difference between the sub gray scale voltage and the common potential. Here, the common potential is described as the GND potential, and the potential of the sub gray scale voltage and GN
The potential difference of the D potential is described as being the same as the sub gray scale voltage.
Description will be made assuming that m is the GND potential. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the first period and the second period are
Each period is described as one frame period, and the case where so-called inversion drive is performed in which the polarity of the sub gray scale voltage is inverted every one frame period is described.

In FIG. 5, when the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned on in the first period, the potential An with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage A501 and the potential Bn with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage B502 are input to the pixel 305. Thus, the gradation n can be displayed. When the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned off, the GN of the sub gray scale voltage A501 is applied to the capacitive element 402 and the capacitive element 412 provided in the sub pixel 400 and the sub pixel 410 of the pixel 305.
By holding the potential An for the D potential and the potential Bn for the GND potential of the sub gray scale voltage B 502, the pixel 305 keeps holding the display of the gray level n. Subsequently, in the second period, when the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned on, the potential of the sub gray scale voltage A 501 is inverted to the polarity of the sub gray scale voltage A 501 and the sub gray scale voltage B 5.
The gray scale n can be displayed by inputting the potential -Dn to the GND potential 02 in the pixel 305. Then, when the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned off, the pixel 305
Of the sub gray-scale voltage A501 with respect to the GND potential of the sub gray-scale voltage A501 and the G of the sub gray-scale voltage A501.
By holding the potential -Dn with respect to the ND potential, the pixel 305 keeps holding the display of the gradation n.

When the inversion driving is performed as described with reference to FIG. 5, it is preferable that the sub gray scale voltages input to the respective sub-pixels constituting one pixel perform the same polarity inversion in the same period. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the potential An and the potential Bn, and the potential -Cn and the potential -Dn preferably have the same polarity.
By setting the polarity of the sub gray scale voltages input to the sub pixels forming one pixel to be the same polarity, the amplitude swing of the sub gray scale voltages input to the adjacent sub pixels can be reduced, and Since the parasitic capacitance between the sub-pixels and the wiring for inputting the sub gray scale voltage can be reduced, a good display can be obtained. The polarity of the sub gray scale voltage input to each sub pixel may be inverted between the sub pixels forming one pixel.

The potential An and the potential applied to the electrodes for controlling the liquid crystal molecules of each sub-pixel described in FIG.
The advantage of the difference between Cn, the potential Bn and the potential -Dn in the first period and the second period will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 6A to 6D, the state of the radial tilt alignment of the MVA liquid crystal, the PVA liquid crystal, or the ASV liquid crystal varies according to the potential applied to the electrode controlling the liquid crystal molecules. Is shown. As an example, FIG. 6 (a) to FIG.
In (d), when the potential An is applied to the electrode for controlling the liquid crystal molecules in the case where the potential | An | <potential | -Cn | <potential | -Dn | <potential | Bn | The radial tilt orientation shown in 6 (a) is shown. Similarly, when a potential Bn is applied to an electrode for controlling liquid crystal molecules, the liquid crystal molecules exhibit the radial tilt alignment shown in FIG. 6B, and a potential -Cn is applied to the electrode for controlling liquid crystal molecules. When the potential -Dn is applied to the electrode for controlling the liquid crystal molecules, the liquid crystal molecules exhibit the radially inclined alignment shown in FIG. 6 (d). Shall be indicated. Note that the inclination angles of the liquid crystal molecules shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are θa, similarly to the relationship of potential | An | <potential | -Cn | <potential | -Dn | <potential | Bn | It has a relation of <θc <θd <θb.

The radial liquid crystal molecules shown in FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (d) have different potentials applied to the electrodes controlling the liquid crystal molecules in the first and second periods, and A plurality of directions in which liquid crystal molecules fall can be present depending on the difference in potential applied to the electrode controlling the.

That is, in the sub-pixel A, the inclination angle θa shown in FIG.
In the second period, it is possible to average the appearance of the liquid crystal molecules by the orientation of the tilt angle θc shown in FIG. 6C. Similarly, sub-pixel B
In the above, in the first period, the orientation of the inclination angle θb shown in FIG.
Then, in the second period, it is possible to average the appearance of the liquid crystal molecules by aligning the tilt angle θd shown in FIG. Also, in the first period, the sub-pixel A
6 (a), and in the sub-pixel B, the liquid crystal molecules are averaged by the orientation of the tilt angle θb shown in FIG. 6 (b). be able to. Similarly, in the second period, in the sub-pixel A, as shown in FIG.
It is possible to average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules by orienting the tilt angle θc shown in and by orienting the tilt angle θd shown in FIG. 6D in the sub-pixel B.
Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, it is possible to average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules from any direction while controlling the light transmittance, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics. Note that the pixel expresses a desired gradation by controlling the light transmittance.

Note that, as described above, when different sub-grayscale voltages are supplied to the sub-pixels in an arbitrary period, here, each frame period, flicker may occur in the display of the display portion. Therefore, it is desirable that the frame frequency input to the drive unit be high. Usually, the frame frequency input to the drive unit is 60 Hz (or 50 Hz), but it is desirable to set the frame frequency to at least double frequency (120 Hz). More preferably, triple frequency (180 Hz) is desirable. If the frame frequency input to the drive unit is increased, the display quality of the moving image can also be improved. Note that when display is performed with a high frame frequency, smooth display can be performed by interpolating data other than the data of the original screen using a motion vector or the like, and residual images can be reduced.

Note that in the case of supplying a sub gray scale voltage to each sub pixel, it is desirable to perform overdrive driving, which is a driving method of supplying a larger voltage or a smaller voltage than the voltage to be originally supplied. The liquid crystal molecules have a slow response speed and are hard to change. Therefore, by supplying a voltage larger or smaller than the voltage to be originally supplied, the liquid crystal molecules respond quickly. As a result, the display quality of a moving image can be improved, smooth display can be performed, and afterimage can be reduced.

The sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B in the first period and the second period described in FIGS. 5 and 6
With regard to the correlation between the gradation of the pixels constituting the pixel and the transmission amount (brightness) of the light of the pixels, the sum of the sub-pixels A, B, and the sub-pixels A and B is shown in FIG.

The luminance shown in FIG. 7 refers to the amount of light transmission at the front of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the brightness of light emitted from a unit area is the light emitted from the backlight portion of the liquid crystal display through the panel including the liquid crystal element and transmitted to the front of the liquid crystal display.

In FIG. 7A, the luminance of each of the sub-pixels A and B and the sub-pixels when the pixels forming the sub-pixels A and B display desired gradations in the first period are shown. It shows the total value of the luminance of A and the sub-pixel B. Further, in FIG. 7B, the sub-pixels A and B when the pixels constituting the sub-pixels A and B display desired gradations in the second period.
The sum of the respective luminances and the luminances of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is shown.

7 (a) and 7 (b) will be described. The horizontal axes in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b) are
It indicates the gradation of the pixels constituting the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, and the maximum value of the gradation is G _{MA
Assume X.} The vertical axes in FIGS. 7A and 7B indicate the luminance of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B, and the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, and the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B The maximum value of the luminances of the sum of the sums of the sub-pixels A and B is defined as L of the sum of the sub-pixels A and B. The maximum value of the luminance of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is set to L / 2 which is half of the luminance of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, but the area of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is Each is due to one half of the pixel.

In FIG. 7A corresponding to the first period, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is approximately in proportion to the gradation, as indicated by the curve of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. To increase. Meanwhile, FIG.
In (a), the luminances of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B are based on the sub gray scale signal which is a signal corresponding to the luminance. The sub gray level signal is a signal obtained by the gray level data conversion section referring to the look-up table stored in advance in the gray level data storage section as described above. Then, based on the look-up table stored in the gray scale data storage unit, the gray scale data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gray scale signals in the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B.
Therefore, the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B shown in FIG. 7A is different from the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B And the sub-pixel B have different curves.

In FIG. 7B corresponding to the second period, the luminance for displaying a desired gray scale is
In the same manner as in the above, as indicated by the curve of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, it increases approximately in proportion to the gradation. Further, the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B shown in FIG. 7B is the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, as in FIG. And a curve different between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.

The correlation between the gradation of the pixel and the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is described by overlapping FIG. 7A illustrating the first period and FIG. 7B illustrating the second period. The figure that
It is shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, and the second pixel shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B. It shows about the curve of the luminance to the gradation of a pixel about the sub pixel B of a period. The maximum values of the luminances of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B are L / 2 which is half the luminance of the sum of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, as in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b). Become.

In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period,
The liquid crystal molecules are different in potential applied to the electrodes for controlling liquid crystal molecules in the sub-pixel A in the second period and in the sub-pixel B in the second period, and the liquid crystal molecules are inclined by different angles. It averages the appearance of molecules. Therefore, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, and the second period in the low gray level, the middle gray level, and the high gray level in FIG.
The luminances of the sub-pixel A in the period and the sub-pixel B in the second period are shown in FIG.

In the present invention, the gradation data conversion unit refers to the look-up table stored in the gradation data storage unit for the sub gradation signal which is a signal to be input to the sub-pixel in the first period and the second period. It is a signal obtained by Then, based on the look-up table stored in the gray scale data storage unit, the gray scale data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gray scale signals in the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B in the first period and the second period can be made different from each other. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules regardless of which direction the display portion is viewed, and can improve the viewing angle characteristics.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Second Embodiment

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment 1 will be further described. In particular, in the present embodiment, the configuration of sub-pixels constituting a pixel will be described.

With reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B described in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B are 1/2 of the pixel has been described. 10 (a) and 10
In (b), a configuration in which the area of the sub pixel A and the area of the sub pixel B are different will be described. The vertical and horizontal axes in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are the same as in FIG. 7 described in the first embodiment.
(A) is similar to FIG. 7 (b). Note that the areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B are respectively
An area of 2/3 of one pixel and an area of 1/3 of one pixel are set. Therefore, FIG. 10 (a), FIG.
Assuming that the luminance of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is L, the maximum value of the luminance of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B at 0 (b) is 2 L / 3 in the sub pixel A and L in the sub pixel B It will be / 3.

In FIG. 10A corresponding to the first period, as in FIG. 7A, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is indicated by a curve of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. Approximately, in proportion to the gradation. Then, in FIG. 10A, the luminances of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B are based on the sub gray scale signal which is a signal corresponding to the luminance. The sub gray level signal is a signal obtained by the gray level data conversion section referring to the look-up table stored in advance in the gray level data storage section as described above. Then, based on the look-up table stored in the gradation data storage unit,
The gradation data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gradation signals in the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. Therefore, the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B shown in FIG. 10A is different from the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B And the sub-pixel B have different curves.

In FIG. 10B corresponding to the second period, the luminance for displaying a desired gray scale is
As shown in (a), as indicated by the curve of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, it increases approximately in proportion to the gradation. Also, the curve of the luminance with respect to the gradation of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B shown in FIG. And a curve different between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.

The correlation between the gradation of the pixel and the luminance of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is described by overlapping FIG. 10 (a) describing the first period and FIG. 10 (b) describing the second period The resulting diagram is shown in FIG. In FIG. 11, the sub pixel A in the first period, the sub pixel B in the first period, the sub pixel A in the second period, and the second pixel A shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. It shows about the curve of the luminance to the gradation of a pixel about the sub pixel B of a period. Note that sub-pixel A
Assuming that the luminance of the sum of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B is L, the maximum value of the luminance of the sub pixel B and the maximum value of the luminance of the sub pixel B is 2L / 3 in the sub pixel A, as shown in FIG. , L at sub-pixel B
It will be three. As shown in FIG. 11, even when the area of the sub-pixels is different, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, and the sub-pixel in the second period In B, it is possible to make each change in luminance according to the gradation of the pixel different.

In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period,
The liquid crystal molecules are different in potential applied to the electrodes for controlling liquid crystal molecules in the sub-pixel A in the second period and in the sub-pixel B in the second period, and the liquid crystal molecules are inclined by different angles. It averages the appearance of molecules. The present invention is shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b).
As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 11, it is also effective when the pixels of the display portion are configured by making the areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B different. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules from any direction of the display portion, and can improve the viewing angle characteristics.

Further, even if the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is formed of three or more sub-pixels of one pixel, the viewing angle characteristics are improved as in the case of the sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B described above. Can.
The case where one pixel is configured by three sub-pixels in FIGS. 12 and 13 will be described as an example. Note that the three sub-pixels illustrated in FIGS. 12 and 13 are a first sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel A), a second sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel B), and a third sub-pixel Also referred to as a pixel C).

FIG. 12 schematically shows a look-up table stored in a gradation data storage unit of a liquid crystal display device having a display unit in which each of a plurality of pixels is composed of a sub-pixel A, a sub-pixel B and a sub-pixel C. It is shown. The look-up table is shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
Similar to the look-up table shown in (a), a plurality of combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal are included. In the look-up table shown in FIG. 12, the sub gradation signal A input to the sub pixel A, the sub gradation signal B input to the sub pixel B, and the sub gradation signal input to the sub pixel C (third sub gradation Signal or sub gray level signal C: hereinafter, the sub gray level signal C
And the first combination data 1201 corresponding to. Also, the sub gradation signal A,
The sub gray-scale signal B and second combination data 1202 corresponding to the sub gray-scale signal C are included. In FIG. 12, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 0, the first combination data 1 is
As 201, the sub gray level signal A, the sub gray level signal B, and the combination data (a0, b0, c0) corresponding to the sub gray level signal C are referred to, and as the second combination data 1202, the sub gray level signal A , Sub gradation signal B, and combination data corresponding to sub gradation signal C (d0
, E0, f0). Similarly, the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 1 to (n−
In the case of 1), the first combination data 1201 includes combination data (a1, b1, c1) to (a (n-1) corresponding to the sub gray level signal A, the sub gray level signal B, and the sub gray level signal C. , B
With reference to (n−1) and c (n−1), in the second combination data 1202, combination data corresponding to the sub gray level signal A, the sub gray level signal B, and the sub gray level signal C d1, e
Reference will be made to 1, f1) to (d (n-1), f (n-1), g (n-1)).

Here, the first combination data 1201 and the second combination data 1202 of the look-up table will be described using a specific example.

For example, it is assumed that one pixel of the display unit is divided into three sub-pixels of sub-pixel A, sub-pixel B, and sub-pixel C, respectively. First, for example, when it is assumed that the display unit performs 256 gradation display, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (138) as the gradation signal. Then, in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to three sub-pixels are stored as a look-up table. For example, (10
, 40, 88) and (30, 60, 48) are assumed to be stored. The sum of the combination data of each sub-pixel is, in each combination data,
It is the same. That is, 10 + 40 + 88 = 138 and 30 + 60 + 48 = 138. The first set (10, 40, 88) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is selected as combination data,
It is input to the gradation data converter. Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (10) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A, (40) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B, and (88) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel C Output to the drive unit. The driving unit operates on the plurality of sub gray level signals
D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like are appropriately performed, and the signal is input to the display portion. In each sub-pixel of the display portion, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (10), (40), and (88), and display is performed such that the gradation number is (138) as one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, the gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input again to the gradation data conversion unit as the gradation signal. Here, as an example, even if the frame period changes, the same gradation is displayed. Then, the second set (30, 60, 48) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. Be done. Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (30) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A, (60) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B, and (48) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel C Output to the drive unit. The drive unit is
D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like are performed on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and the signal is input to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, (30), (60), (4)
Light is transmitted with the transmission amount of 8), and display is performed such that the number of gradations becomes (138) as one pixel.

In the next frame period, the first set (10, 40, 88) is again selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit.

When the area of the transmissive region is different between each sub-pixel, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, when combining data is stored in advance in the look-up table, it may be stored in the combining data already taken into consideration. When generating the gray scale voltage from the adjustment signal, the sub gray scale signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

As described above, of the combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal, any one combination data is selected every arbitrary period, and the gradation data conversion unit is selected based on the combination data. By generating the sub gray scale signal and performing display on the display portion, even in the case of display of the same gray scale, it is possible to increase the direction in which liquid crystal molecules are tilted in another direction and aligned every arbitrary period. The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

Subsequently, in FIG. 13, regarding the sub-pixel A, the sub-pixel B, and the sub-pixel C, the correlation between the gradation of the pixels in the first period and the second period and the light transmission amount (luminance) is described. Show the
In FIG. 13, the areas of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B, and the sub pixel C are respectively
It shows about the structure which is / 3. The vertical axis and the horizontal axis in FIG. 13 are the same as those in FIGS. 7A and 7B described in the first embodiment. The area of each of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B, and the sub pixel C is assumed to be 1/3 of the area of the pixel. Therefore, the maximum value of the luminances of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B and the sub pixel C in FIG. 13 is L / 3, where L is the luminance of the sum of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B and the sub pixel C. It becomes. In FIG. 13, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel C in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, the sub-pixel B in the second period, It shows about the curve of the luminance to the gradation of a pixel about the sub pixel C of the 2nd period. As shown in FIG. 13, similarly to FIGS. 8 and 11 described above, even when the number of sub-pixels is three or more, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the second In the sub-pixel C of the period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, the sub-pixel B in the second period, and the sub-pixel C in the second period, the change in luminance according to the gradation of the pixel is different. Can. The present invention is also effective in the case where each of the pixels in the display portion is configured by three or more sub-pixels, ie, sub-pixel A, sub-pixel B, and sub-pixel C, as shown in FIGS. . In particular, since the voltage application state to the liquid crystal element in one frame period can be changed, burn-in and the like of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules from any direction of the display portion, and can improve the viewing angle characteristics.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Third Embodiment

In this embodiment mode, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment Mode 1 and Embodiment Mode 2 will be further described. In the present embodiment, in particular, the first period mentioned above,
The second period will be specifically described.

In the first period and the second period described in FIG. 5 of the first embodiment, the sub gray level signal generated by the gray level data converter with reference to any one of the combination data from the look-up table Are output to each sub-pixel. By generating a sub-gradation signal in the gradation data conversion unit and performing display on the display unit, liquid crystal molecules are inclined and oriented in another direction every arbitrary period, even in the same gradation display. The orientation can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the first period and the second period of the present invention described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are, as shown in FIG. 14A, combination data which is alternately referred to in each frame period. It can be selected and replaced. Note that, when displaying an image such as a moving image, different image data is displayed tens of times (for example, 30 times, 60 times, or 120 times) per second. In the present invention, as the first period and the second period which are different periods, the n-th frame (n is a natural number) is set as the first period, and the (n + 1) th frame is set as the second period. Do. Then, by displaying many different image data in one second, it is possible to reduce display flicker and afterimage of a moving image, and even in the case of display of the same gradation, liquid crystal in another direction every arbitrary period. It is possible to tilt the molecules to increase the direction of orientation, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer.

In the case of a still image or the like, the same image data is displayed over a plurality of frame periods. According to the present invention, even when the same image data is displayed, the sub gray-scale signal is generated with reference to different combination data, and the liquid crystal molecule is inclined in another direction and oriented in every other period. Thus, the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

In the first period and the second period of the present invention described in the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), combination data is alternately displayed every subframe period. By selecting, it is possible to have a configuration to be replaced. Further, a sub-frame means each period obtained by dividing one frame period into a plurality of periods. The subframe is shown in FIG.
A configuration in which one frame period is divided into equal periods by the first sub-frame and the second sub-frame as shown in FIG. 4 (b), or one frame period is divided into first sub-frames as shown in FIG. The frame and the second subframe can be divided into different periods. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15B, the first sub-frame to the third sub-frame can be divided into equal periods, and the first period and the second period can be alternately switched. . In the present invention, the first period and the second period are switched for each subframe period as the first period and the second period which are different periods, and the periods of the subframe periods are equalized, or By making the periods of the sub-frames different, it is possible to increase the orientation in which liquid crystal molecules are tilted and oriented in another direction within one frame period, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved. Further, according to the present invention, even in a configuration in which the first to third subframes are divided into equal periods, and the first period and the second period are alternately switched, similarly, within one frame period, It is possible to tilt the liquid crystal molecules in another direction and to increase the orientation, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer. Furthermore, by dividing each sub-frame period into a plurality, it is possible to reduce display flicker and afterimage of a moving image for display.

In addition to the first period and the second period described in the first and second embodiments, a plurality of periods, for example, a first period to a third period, may be used for each frame period. Alternatively, different combination data may be selected from the look-up table for each subframe period, and may be replaced.

FIG. 16 shows that the first to third periods are each frame period or each subframe period.
It is an example of a look-up table for selecting different combination data. The look-up table shown in FIG. 16 includes sub-gradation signals (referred to as first sub-gradation signals or sub-gradation signals A: hereinafter referred to as sub-gradation signals A) to be input to sub-pixels A, and sub-pixels B. And second combination data 1601 corresponding to a sub gray scale signal (referred to as a second sub gray scale signal or a sub gray scale signal B: hereinafter referred to as a sub gray scale signal B) to be input. Further, it has second combination data 1602 corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. In addition, it has third combination data 1603 corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. In FIG. 16, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 0, the first combination data 1 is
As 601, combination data (a0, 0) corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B.
b0), and as the second combination data 1602, reference is made to the combination data (c0, d0) corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B, and the third combination data 1603 is Combination data corresponding to the gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B (e
Reference is made to 0, f0). Similarly, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 1 to (n-1), the first combination data 1601 is combination data (a1, b1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. ) To (a (n−1), b (n−1)), the second combination data 1602 includes combination data (c1, d1) corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. ) To (c (n-1), d (n-1)), and in the third combination data 1603, combination data (e1, f1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. (E (n-1), f (n-1)) are referred to.

Here, the first combination data 1601, the second combination data 1602, and the third combination data 1603 of the look-up table will be described using a specific example.

For example, the pixels of the display portion are divided into two sub-pixels of sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B,
It is assumed that the area of the light transmission region in each pixel of the display unit 103 is equal in the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. First, for example, when it is assumed that the display unit performs 256 gradation display, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (138) as the gradation signal. Then, in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to two sub-pixels are stored as a look-up table. For example, (50, 88), (90, 48),
It is assumed that three sets of combination data (20, 118) are stored. The sum of combination data of each sub-pixel is the same in each combination data. That is, 50 + 88 = 138, 90 + 48 = 138, and 20 + 118 = 138. Then, according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, it is the first pair (50, 8
8) is selected from the look-up table, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. Then, as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A from the gradation data conversion unit
) As the sub gray level signal of the sub pixel B and (88) as the sub gray level signal of the sub pixel C (8).
8) is output to the drive unit. The drive unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and inputs the signal to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display portion, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (50) and (88), and the number of gradations is one pixel.
The display is performed as in 138).

Next, in the next frame period, the gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input again to the gradation data conversion unit as the gradation signal. Here, as an example, even if the frame period changes, the same gradation is displayed. Then, the second set (90, 48) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. . Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (90) is used as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A, and the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B ((48)
) To the drive unit. The drive unit performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and inputs the signal to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display portion, light is transmitted with the transmission amount of (90) and (48), and the number of gradations (138
The display is made as

Next, similarly in the next frame period, as the gradation signal, the gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. Then, the third set (20, 118) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. . Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (20) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A and (118) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B to the driving unit. The drive unit performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and inputs the signal to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display portion, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (20) and (118), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (138) as one pixel.

In the next frame period, the first pair (50, 88) is selected again from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit.

As described above, among the three or more combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal, any one combination data is selected every arbitrary period, and the gradation is determined based on the combination data. By generating a sub gray level signal in the data conversion section and performing display on the display section, the direction in which liquid crystal molecules are tilted in another direction every time the display is performed, even if the display is the same gray level Thus, the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

When the area of the transmissive region is different between each sub-pixel, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission areas of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, when combining data is stored in advance in the look-up table, it may be stored in the combining data already taken into consideration. When generating the gray scale voltage from the adjustment signal, the sub gray scale signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

One of the first combination data to the third combination data shown in FIG. 16 is referred to for each of the first to third periods. Then, based on any one of the selected first combination data to third combination data, the sub gray level signal generated by the gray level data conversion unit is output to each sub pixel. As shown in FIG. 17A, the first period to the third period are configured to be switched every one frame period, and display flicker or
The residual image of the moving image can be reduced, and even in the same gradation display, the liquid crystal molecules can be tilted in another direction and the orientation can be increased every other period, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer Can be improved. In the first to third periods, as shown in FIG. 17B, switching is performed every subframe period to reduce display flicker and afterimage of a moving image. By increasing the number of sub-frames, it is possible to tilt the liquid crystal molecules in another direction every It can improve. In the first to third periods, as shown in FIG. 17C, switching is performed every subframe period and over a plurality of frame periods to reduce display flicker and residual images of moving images. Even in the same gray scale display, it is possible to tilt the liquid crystal molecules in another direction and increase the orientation for every given period, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer. .

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Embodiment 4

In this embodiment, a structure which is different from the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in any of Embodiments 1 to 3 will be described. In Embodiments 1 to 3 above,
The configuration has been described in which another look-up table is selected in the first period and the second period out of the plurality of combination data stored in the gradation data storage unit. In this embodiment, a configuration in which the sub gray level signal generated by the gray level data conversion unit is output to each sub pixel by referring to any one of a plurality of combination data for each pixel constituting the display unit. explain. For example, in one pixel (first pixel), the first combination data is input to the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B, and in the other pixel (second pixel), the second combination data is input to the sub pixel A And sub pixel B. As a result, in the region including two pixels, the transmission amount of light can be averaged by the first pixel and the second pixel. Therefore, by generating a sub-gradation signal in the gradation data conversion unit and performing display on the display unit, liquid crystal molecules are directed in different directions for each pixel constituting the display unit even if the display is of the same gradation. The orientation direction can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

An example in which display is performed with reference to any one of combination data from a look-up table for each pixel constituting a display unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In FIG. 18 and FIG.
An example will be specifically described in which either the first combination data or the second combination data is selected from the plurality of look-up tables to display a pixel.

18A, 18B, and 18C show the display portion 1800, a pixel region which refers to one of the first combination data and the second combination data (hereinafter referred to as a first region). A region 1801), and a pixel region (hereinafter, a second region 1802) which refers to the other of the first combination data or the second combination data. As shown in FIG. 18A, the pixels in the odd columns of the pixel area can be referred to as a first area 1801, and the pixels in the even columns of the pixel area can be referred to as a second area 1802. Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the pixels in the odd-numbered rows of the pixel region can be set as the first region 1801 and the pixels in the even-numbered rows of the pixel region can be set as the second region 1802. Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the odd row of the pixel region, the pixels in the odd column are the first region 1801 and the pixels in the even column are the second region 1802, and in the even row of the pixel region, the odd column It is also possible to arrange the pixels in the second region 1802 and the pixels in the even columns as the first region 1801 in a so-called checkerboard pattern.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 18A, 18B, and 18C, the pixels in the odd or even rows are arranged in the row direction (the direction in which the pixels in the row direction are extended). FIGS. 19 (a), 19 (b), and 19 (c) show so-called delta arrangements in which the pixels are arranged to be shifted by 1/2 pixel. Figure 19
As shown in (a), pixels corresponding to odd columns of the pixel area can be set as a first area 1801, and pixels corresponding to even columns of the pixel area can be set as a second area 1802. Also, FIG. 19 (b
As shown in), the pixels in the odd rows of the pixel region can be set as a first region 1801, and the pixels in the even rows of the pixel region can be set as a second region 1802. Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, in the odd rows of the pixel area, the pixels corresponding to the odd columns are referred to as a first area 1801 and the pixels corresponding to the even columns are referred to as a second area 1802. In this case, it is also possible to arrange the pixels corresponding to the odd columns as the second region 1802 and the pixels corresponding to the even columns as the first region 1801.

Also in the configurations shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the sub gray level signals generated by the gray level data converter with reference to the first combination data or the second combination data for each pixel constituting the display portion are It can be output to sub-pixels. By generating a sub-gradation signal by the gradation data conversion unit and performing display on the display unit, even for display of the same gradation, for each pixel constituting the display unit,
It is possible to tilt the liquid crystal molecules in another direction and to increase the orientation, and to improve the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer.

The sub gray scale voltage input to each sub-pixel is preferably so-called reverse drive that changes the polarity of the sub gray scale voltage input every predetermined period. Preferably, sub-gradation voltages of the same polarity are input as the sub-gradation voltages input to the respective sub-pixels constituting one pixel. By setting the polarity of the sub gray scale voltages input to the sub pixels forming one pixel to be the same polarity, the amplitude swing of the sub gray scale voltages input to the adjacent sub pixels can be reduced, and Since the parasitic capacitance between the sub-pixels and the wiring for inputting the sub gray scale voltage can be reduced, a good display can be obtained. Inversion driving includes, for example, source line inversion driving, gate line inversion driving, dot inversion driving, or other inversion driving in addition to frame inversion driving in which video signals having the same polarity are input to all pixels every one frame period. It may be

Further, a specific operation example of the configuration described above with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. In FIG. 21, a display unit 2000 including a plurality of pixels, a gate driver 2001 for driving the plurality of pixels, and a source driver 2002 are included. The plurality of pixels are arranged in m rows and n columns (m and n are natural numbers). In addition, in the display portion 2000, m wirings for controlling the operation of the pixel by the gate driver 2001, the source driver 2002
Further, n wirings for controlling the operation of the pixel extend respectively. In FIG. 20, each of the plurality of pixels of the display portion 2000 is a pixel in one row and one column (1-1
), If it is a pixel of 1 row 2 columns (1-2), and if it is a pixel of 1 row n columns, (1-n), m rows n
If it is a pixel of a column, it will be described by adding an address in a manner such as (m-n), and FIG. 21 will be described.

21 (a), 21 (b) and 21 (c) show the display unit 2 of FIG. 20 in one frame period.
FIG. 16 is a diagram for describing whether a gradation signal corresponding to each pixel of 000 selects the first combination data or the second combination data to generate a sub-gradation signal. Figure 21 (
In the diagram shown in a), an example is shown in which the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit serially in the order of pixels in the row direction is alternately selected as the first combination data or the second combination data. ing. By alternately selecting the first combination data or the second combination data for each gradation signal of one pixel, as shown in FIG. 18A or 19A in each pixel of the display portion, The sub gray level signal can be output to each sub pixel. Figure 21 (
In the diagram shown in b), the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit serially in the order of pixels in the row direction is the first combination data or the second combination data, and the gradation signal for one row An example in which each pixel is selected alternately (ie, n pixels) is shown. By alternately selecting the first combination data or the second combination data for each gray scale signal of pixels in one row and every row, in each pixel of the display portion, as shown in FIG. Sub) gradation signals can be output to each sub pixel as shown in FIG. In the diagram shown in FIG. 21 (c),
Gradation signals serially input to the gradation data conversion unit in the order of pixels in the row direction are alternately selected in the first combination data or the second combination data in each row, and differ from each other in odd rows and even rows An example in which the first combination data or the second combination data is selected is shown. By alternately selecting the first combination data or the second combination data in each pixel and in odd rows and even rows, in each pixel of the display portion, as shown in FIG.
Sub-gradation signal can be output to each sub-pixel as shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 21 (a), 21 (b) and 21 (c), the selection of combination data from the look-up table according to the gradation signal in one frame period has been described, but in one subframe period Even if there is, display can be performed by performing selection corresponding to each pixel in the same manner.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Fifth Embodiment

In this embodiment, a structure which is different from the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in any of Embodiments 1 to 4 will be described. In Embodiments 1 to 4 above,
The configuration has been described in which the viewing angle characteristics are improved by using a look-up table having a plurality of combination data stored in the gradation data storage unit. In this embodiment, a configuration will be described in which a plurality of combination data are obtained by arithmetic processing based on the number of gradations of gradation signals. For example, when calculating combination data by arithmetic processing, combination data can be output without bias by using random numbers. As a result, in each pixel of the display portion, the transmission amount of light can be averaged. Therefore, by generating a sub-gradation signal in the gradation data conversion unit and performing display on the display unit, liquid crystal molecules are directed in different directions for each pixel constituting the display unit even if the display is of the same gradation. The orientation direction can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described effects, there is no need to store a look-up table in the gradation data storage unit, and the storage capacity of the gradation data storage unit can be reduced. And downsizing can be achieved.

Hereinafter, a specific example will be described in which combination data corresponding to the gradation signal to be referred to for each pixel constituting the display unit is obtained by arithmetic processing.

It is assumed that the pixels of the display portion are divided into two sub-pixels of sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B. First, for example, when it is assumed that the display unit performs 256 gradation display, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (X) as a gradation signal (X is a natural number of 0 or more and 255 or less). Then, in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (X) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. In the gradation data storage unit, the combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal A input to the sub pixel A is XA, and the combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal input to the sub pixel B is XB, and the random number generated is α ( Assuming that α is a number of 0 or more and 1 or less), 2 of XA = X × α, XB = X−XA
Calculate multiple combination data from one equation. More specifically, the number of gradations is (120),
When the random number α is 0.75, the combination data corresponding to the two sub-pixels is XA = 12
By calculating 0 × 0.75 = 90 and XB = 120−90 = 30, (90, 30) can be obtained as combination data corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. Note that the total sum of combination data of each sub-pixel is equal to the number of gradations. In other words, 90+
It is 30 = 120. Then, combination data (90, 30) corresponding to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit is input to the gradation data conversion unit. Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (90) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A and (30) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B to the driving unit. The drive unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and inputs the signal to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (90) and (30), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (120) for one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, as the gradation signal, the gradation signal having the number of gradations (120) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. Here, as an example, even if the frame period changes, the same gradation is displayed. Then, in the gradation data storage unit, a random number is generated according to the input of the gradation signal to the gradation data storage unit, and when the random number is 0.40, the combination data corresponding to the two sub-pixels is XA = 120 × 0.40 = 48, XB = 120-48 = 72
Thus, (48, 72) is obtained as combination data corresponding to the sub gray level signal A and the sub gray level signal B. Note that the total sum of combination data of each sub-pixel is equal to the number of gradations. That is, 48 + 72 = 120. Then, combination data (48, 72) corresponding to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit is input to the gradation data conversion unit. Then, as a sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A from the gradation data conversion unit
And (72) as a sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B to the drive unit. The drive unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, polarity inversion of the signal, and the like on the plurality of sub gray scale signals, and inputs the signal to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display portion, light is transmitted with the transmission amounts of (48) and (72), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (120) as one pixel.

When combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing using random numbers, a value larger than the number of gradations that can be displayed by each sub-pixel may be calculated. For example, when displaying 256 gradations and the areas of the transmissive regions of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B which one pixel has are the same, the number of gradations displayed in one pixel is (200). If random number α is 0.75, then XA =
It becomes 200 × 0.75 = 150. However, the sub-pixel A can display only up to 128 gradations. The reason is that, since one pixel is configured by the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B having the same transmissive region, in the sub pixel A, the area of the transmissive region is halved. Therefore, when the combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing using random numbers, when the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A is exceeded, the maximum number of gradations is set as the number of gradations in the sub-pixel A. By this,
One pixel can be displayed correctly.

Alternatively, as another method, the combination data may be obtained again by arithmetic processing using random numbers. By obtaining combination data by arithmetic processing using random numbers until the number of gradations falls below the maximum number of gradations, one pixel can be correctly displayed.

Alternatively, as another method, when the maximum number of gradations is exceeded, XA = X × α × α is used as another expression for calculating combination data using random numbers. Since α is 1 or less, the value of XA can be reduced. Thereby, the value of XA can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub pixel A. If the gradation is still larger than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub pixel A,
It is sufficient to multiply α until it falls below. That is, if XA = X × α ^N (N is an integer of 1 or more), XA can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A.

Similarly, when the number of gradations displayed by one pixel is (200) and the random number α is 0.1, XA = 20.
It becomes 0x0.1 = 20 and XB = 200-20 = 180. However, in the sub-pixel B, the number of gradations can only be displayed up to 128. This is because, in the sub-pixel B, since one pixel is configured by the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B having the same transmissive region, in the sub-pixel B, the area of the transmissive region is halved. Therefore, when the combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing using random numbers, when the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B is exceeded, the maximum number of gradations is set as the number of gradations in the sub-pixel B . Then, the sub-pixel A newly calculates the value of XA again using the equation XA = X−XB. Thus, one pixel can be correctly displayed.

Alternatively, as another method, the combination data may be obtained again by arithmetic processing using random numbers. By obtaining combination data by arithmetic processing using random numbers until the number of gradations falls below the maximum number of gradations, one pixel can be correctly displayed.

Alternatively, as another method, when the maximum number of gradations is exceeded, XA = X × (1−α) is used as another equation for calculating combination data using random numbers. Since α is 1 or less, XA
The value of can be increased. Thereby, the value of XB can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B. If the gradation number is still larger than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B, the product multiplied by α may be subtracted from 1 until it falls below. That is, XA = X ×
If (1-α ^N ) (N is an integer of 1 or more), XB can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B.

As described above, calculation of combination data using random numbers can be normally performed by performing various arithmetic processing. However, various methods can be used to calculate combination data using random numbers, and the present invention is not limited to this.

As described above, although display of the same number of gradations as in the previous frame period is performed as one pixel, the transmission amount in each sub-pixel is different from that in the previous frame. is there. Therefore, the alignment state of liquid crystal molecules in each sub-pixel can be made different for each frame period. Therefore, when the screen of the display unit is viewed from a specific direction, the transmission amount of light is averaged, so that the viewing angle can be widened.

Furthermore, in the next frame period, random numbers are generated again according to the input of the gradation signal to the gradation data storage unit, and the combination data is determined by arithmetic processing. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the look-up table in the gradation data storage unit and the storage capacity of the gradation data storage unit can be reduced, the cost and size of the display device can be reduced.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Sixth Embodiment

In this embodiment mode, display methods which can be applied to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
This will be described using 5.

The alignment of liquid crystal molecules of the display system applicable to the present invention is the MVA system, as shown in FIG.
, It shows in FIG.24 (b). The MVA method is a method of dividing the alignment of liquid crystal molecules in a plurality of directions, and compensating each other for the viewing angle dependency. In FIGS. 24A and 24B, a layer 2600 including a liquid crystal element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are disposed to face each other. Then, on the first substrate 2601 side,
A layer 2603 including a polarizer is stacked, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged to be in a cross nicol state.

Although not shown, a backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2605 are formed on the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 24A, in the MVA mode, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 are used.
A protrusion 2607 having a triangular cross section and a protrusion 2608 are provided on the surface 06 for orientation control. When a voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, the white display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules have projections 2607,
And it will be in the state which fell down with respect to the protrusion 2608 and was located in a line. Then, the light from the backlight is a layer containing a pair of polarizers arranged so as to be in a crossed nicol (a layer 2 containing a first polarizer)
603, and a second layer 2604 including a polarizer, and predetermined image display is performed. At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24B, when no voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed, that is, the display is turned off. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate, resulting in black display.

As an example of the MVA mode, a top view and a cross-sectional view are shown in FIG. In FIG. 60A, the second electrode is formed in a bent pattern like a V-shape, and the second electrode 26 is formed.
06a, 2606b, and 2606c. Second electrodes 2606a, 2606b, 2
An insulating layer 2651 which is an alignment film is formed over the conductive layer 606c. As shown in FIG. 60B, protrusions 2607 are formed on the first electrode 2605 as second electrodes 2606 a, 2606 b, and 260.
It is formed in a shape corresponding to 6c and is covered with an insulating layer 2650 which is an alignment film.
The openings of the second electrodes 2606a, 2606b, and 2606c function like protrusions, and can move liquid crystal molecules. Note that the first electrode 2605 may be formed on the protrusion 2607.

In addition, there is a PVA system for the alignment of liquid crystal molecules of the display system applicable to the present invention, as shown in FIG.
), Shown in FIG. Similar to the MVA method, the PVA method is a method of dividing the alignment of liquid crystal molecules in a plurality of directions, and compensating each other for the viewing angle dependency. Figure 25 (a
25B, a layer 2600 including a liquid crystal element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are disposed to face each other. Then, a layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, a layer 26 including a first polarizer
03 and the layer 2604 containing the second polarizer are arranged to be in a crossed nicol.

Although not shown, a backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2605 are formed on the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the PVA method, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 are used.
The slit 06 (also referred to as a slit provided in the electrode or an electrode notch portion) having a different pattern 06 for orientation control is provided. When a voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, white display is performed as shown in FIG. 25A. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are inclined and aligned with respect to the slits of the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606. Then, the light from the backlight is a layer containing a pair of polarizers arranged to be in a crossed nicol (a layer 2603 including a first polarizer, and a layer 26 including a second polarizer).
04), and predetermined video display is performed. At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side. Also, FIG.
As shown in (b), when a voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed, that is, the display is turned off. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate, resulting in black display.

The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method or the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and configuring one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention may be any display method in which liquid crystal molecules can be displayed with tilt alignment or radial tilt alignment in sub-pixels constituting one pixel, and for example, ferroelectric liquid crystals may be used. Or an antiferroelectric liquid crystal. Further, the driving method of the liquid crystal is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, and a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, an IPS (In)
-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric aligne)
d Micro-cell mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence) mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal mode, AFLC (AntiFerroelectric L)
Liquid Crystal) can be used. Further, the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal element, and may be a light emitting element (including organic EL or inorganic EL).

As an example, FIGS. 59A and 59B show schematic views of a liquid crystal display device in TN mode.

A layer 2600 including a display element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are disposed to face each other. Then, a layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2 including a second polarizer is stacked on the second substrate 2602 side.
604 are arranged. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged to be in a cross nicol state.

Although not shown, a backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2605 are formed on the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided. Then, the first electrode 2605 which is an electrode on the opposite side to the backlight, that is, the electrode on the viewing side is formed to have at least a light transmitting property.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606 in a normally white mode (referred to as a vertical electric field mode), as shown in FIG.
Black display is performed as shown in 9 (A). At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically.
Then, light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate and becomes black.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59B, when a voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, white display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally and are rotated in a plane. As a result, light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers arranged to be in a crossed nicol (a layer including a first polarizer 2603 and a layer including a second polarizer 2604). The predetermined video display is performed.

At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter in the reflective region. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

As another example, as a liquid crystal material used in the TN mode, a known one may be used.

FIG. 59C is a schematic view of a liquid crystal display device in the VA mode. The VA mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are oriented perpendicular to the substrate when no electric field is applied.

Similarly to FIGS. 59A and 59B, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. Then, the first electrode 2605 which is an electrode on the opposite side to the backlight, that is, the electrode on the viewing side is formed to have at least a light transmitting property. Then, a layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged to be in a cross nicol state.

In a liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2 are provided.
When a voltage is applied to the electrode 606 (longitudinal electric field method), as shown in FIG. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally. Then, light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers arranged to be crossed nicols (a layer including a first polarizer 2603 and a layer including a second polarizer 2604). The predetermined video display is performed. At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter is formed on the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602.
It can be provided on either side.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59D, when a voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed, that is, the display is turned off. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate, resulting in black display.

In this way, in the off state, the liquid crystal molecules rise vertically to the substrate to display black.
In the ON state, liquid crystal molecules fall horizontally with respect to the substrate to display white. In the off state, since the liquid crystal molecules rise, the light from the polarized backlight passes through the cell without being affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules, and completely in the layer including the polarizer on the opposing substrate It can be shut off.

Further, as an example, FIGS. 61A and 61B show schematic views of a liquid crystal display device in OCB mode. In the OCB mode, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer forms an optically compensated state,
This is called bend orientation.

Similarly to FIG. 59, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. Although not shown, a backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer 2604 containing the second polarizer. Then, the first electrode 2605 which is an electrode on the opposite side to the backlight, that is, the electrode on the viewing side is formed to have at least a light transmitting property. Then, a layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. Note that
The layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged to be in a cross nicol state.

In a liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2 are provided.
When a constant on-voltage is applied to 606 (vertical electric field mode), black display is performed as shown in FIG. 61 (A). At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. Then, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate and becomes black display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61B, when a constant off voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, white display is performed. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are in the state of bend alignment. As a result, the light from the backlight is a layer including a pair of polarizers arranged to be in a crossed nicol (a layer including a first polarizer 2603 and a layer including a second polarizer)
604), and a predetermined video display is performed. At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

In such an OCB mode, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be optically compensated in the liquid crystal layer, so that the viewing angle dependency is small, and the contrast ratio can be enhanced by the layer including a pair of laminated polarizers.

FIGS. 61C and 61D show schematic views of liquid crystals in the FLC mode and the AFLC mode.

Similarly to FIG. 59, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. And the other side of the backlight,
That is, the first electrode 2605 which is an electrode on the viewing side is formed to have at least light-transmitting property. A layer 2603 containing a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 containing a second polarizer is arranged on the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, the first
The layer 2603 including the polarizers and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged to be in a cross nicol state.

In a liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 can be used.
When a voltage is applied to the electrodes 06 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode), white color is displayed as shown in FIG. 61C. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally in a direction shifted from the rubbing direction. As a result, light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers arranged to be in a crossed nicol (a layer including a first polarizer 2603 and a layer including a second polarizer 2604). The predetermined video display is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61D, when a voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally along the rubbing direction. Then, light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate and becomes black.

At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

Known liquid crystal materials may be used for the FLC mode and the AFLC mode.

As an example, FIGS. 62A and 62B show schematic views of a liquid crystal display device in an IPS mode. The IPS mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to a substrate, and electrodes have a transverse electric field method provided on only one substrate side.

The IPS mode is characterized in that liquid crystal is controlled by a pair of electrodes provided on one of the substrates. Therefore, a pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 are provided over the second substrate 2602. The pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 preferably have light transmitting properties. Then, a layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, a layer 26 including a first polarizer
03 and the layer 2604 containing the second polarizer are arranged to be in a crossed nicol.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, when a voltage is applied to the pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802, liquid crystal molecules are aligned along electric lines of force deviated from the rubbing direction as shown in FIG. It becomes an on state where white display is performed. Then, the light from the backlight contains a pair of polarizers arranged to be crossed nicols (a layer 260 including a first polarizer).
3 and the second layer 2604 including the polarizer can be passed through, and a predetermined image display is performed.

At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62B, when a voltage is not applied between the pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802, black display is performed, that is, an off state. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally along the rubbing direction. As a result, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate, resulting in black display.

An example of a pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 that can be used in the IPS mode is shown in FIG. As shown in the top views of FIGS. 63A to 63D, the pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 are alternately formed, and in FIG. 63A, the electrodes 2801a and 2802a have a corrugation. In FIG. 63B, the electrodes 2801 b and 2802 b have a wavy shape.
Is a shape having a concentric opening, and in FIG. 63C, an electrode 2801 c and an electrode 2 are formed.
Reference numeral 802 c denotes a comb-like shape which is partially overlapped with each other, and in FIG.
The electrodes 2802 d have a comb shape and are shaped such that the electrodes are engaged with each other.

As an example, in addition to IPS mode, FFS mode can also be used. In the FFS mode, in the IPS mode, the pair of electrodes is formed on the same surface, but the pair of electrodes is not formed in the same layer, and as shown in FIGS. 62C and 62D, the electrode 2803 is formed. An electrode 2804 is formed on the top through an insulating film.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a configuration, when a voltage is applied to the pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804, white display is performed as shown in FIG. 62C. Then,
The light from the backlight contains a pair of polarizers arranged to be crossed nicols (
It is possible to pass through the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer, and a predetermined image display is performed.

At this time, full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62D, when a voltage is not applied between the pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804, black display is performed, that is, an off state. At this time, liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally and rotated in a plane. As a result, the light from the backlight can not pass through the substrate, resulting in black display.

An example of a pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804 that can be used in the FFS mode is shown in FIG. As shown in the top views of FIGS. 64A to 64D, electrodes 2804 formed in various patterns are formed over the electrodes 2803. In FIG. 64A, the electrodes 283 on the electrodes 2803a are formed.
In FIG. 64 (B), the electrode 2804 on the electrode 2803 b is denoted by 04 a.
b is a concentric shape, and the electrode 2804c on the electrode 2803c has a comb shape in FIG. 64 (C) so that the electrodes are interdigitated, and the electrode 2 on the electrode 2803d in FIG. 64 (D)
804 d is a comb-like shape.

Known liquid crystal materials may be used for the IPS mode and the FFS mode.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Seventh Embodiment

In this embodiment mode, regarding the configuration of the liquid crystal panel of the display portion in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention,
This will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a TFT substrate, an opposing substrate, an opposing substrate and a TFT
The structure of a liquid crystal panel having a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between the substrates and the substrate will be described. FIG. 26A is a top view of the liquid crystal panel. FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-D in FIG. Note that FIG. 26B shows a case where a top gate transistor is formed on a substrate 50100 when a crystalline semiconductor film (polysilicon film) is used as a semiconductor film, and is a cross section when the display method is MVA. FIG.

In the liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 26A, a pixel portion 50101, a scan line driver circuit 50105a, a scan line driver circuit 50105b, and a signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed over a substrate 50100. Pixel portion 50101, scan line driver circuit 50105a, scan line driver circuit 5010
5 b and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed of a substrate 50100 with a sealant 50516.
And the substrate 50515 are sealed. Also, by the TAB method, the FPC 5020
0, and an IC chip 50530 is disposed on the substrate 50100.

Note that the scanning line driving circuit 50105 a (gate driver), the scanning line driving circuit 50105 b,
As the signal line driver circuit 50106 (source driver), one similar to that described in Embodiment 1 can be used.

The cross-sectional structure taken along line C-D in FIG. 26A will be described with reference to FIG.
A pixel portion 50101 and its peripheral driver circuit portion (a scanning line driver circuit 501) are formed over a substrate 50100.
Although the scan line driver circuit 50105 b and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed, the driver circuit area 50525 (scan line driver circuit 50105 b) and the pixel area 50526 (pixel portion 50101) are shown here. It is done.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over a substrate 50100 as a base film. As the insulating film 50501, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (Si
A single layer of an insulating film such as OxNy) or a stacked layer of at least two films of these films is used. Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used in a portion in contact with the semiconductor. As a result, electron traps in the base film and hysteresis of transistor characteristics can be suppressed. In addition, it is desirable to dispose at least one film containing a large amount of nitrogen as a base film. Thereby, impurities from the glass can be reduced.

Next, over the insulating film 50501, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed by a photolithography method, an ink jet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, an insulating film 50503 is formed over the semiconductor film 50502 as a gate insulating film. Note that as the insulating film 50503, a single layer or a stacked structure of a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like can be used. Semiconductor film 505
The insulating film 50503 in contact with 02 is preferably a silicon oxide film. This is because the trap level at the interface with the semiconductor film 50502 is reduced when the silicon oxide film is used. When the gate electrode is formed of Mo, a gate insulating film in contact with the gate electrode is preferably a silicon nitride film. That is because the silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo. Here, the insulating film 505
As 03, a silicon oxynitride film (composition ratio Si having a thickness of 115 nm by plasma CVD method
= 32%, O = 59%, N = 7%, H = 2%).

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed over the insulating film 50503 as a gate electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. In addition, the conductive film 5
As 0504, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt
Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, etc., and alloys of these elements. Or
You may comprise by lamination | stacking of the alloy of these elements or these elements. Here, the gate electrode is formed of Mo. Mo is preferable because it is easy to etch and resistant to heat. Note that for the semiconductor film 50502, the conductive film 50504 or the semiconductor film 505 using a resist as a mask
An impurity element is doped to 02, and a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed. Note that the impurity region may have a high concentration region and a low concentration region formed by controlling the impurity concentration. Note that the conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 has a dual gate structure. The dual gate structure of the transistor 50521 can reduce the off-state current of the transistor 50521. Note that the dual gate structure is a structure having two gate electrodes. However, a plurality of gate electrodes may be provided over the channel region of the transistor. The conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 may have a single gate structure. Also,
The transistor 50519 and the transistor 505 are manufactured in the same step as the transistor 50521
20 can be made.

Next, an insulating film 50505 is formed as an interlayer film over the insulating film 50503 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50503. Note that as the insulating film 50505, an organic material, an inorganic material, or a stacked structure thereof can be used. For example, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, aluminum nitride oxide or aluminum oxide having a nitrogen content higher than oxygen content, diamond like carbon (DLC), polysilazane, nitrogen containing Carbon (CN), PS
It can be formed of a material selected from materials including G (phosphorus glass), BPSG (phosphorus boron glass), alumina, and other inorganic insulating materials. Also, an organic insulating material may be used, and as the organic material, either photosensitive or non-photosensitive may be used, and polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, resist or benzocyclobutene, siloxane resin, etc. may be used. . Note that the siloxane resin corresponds to a resin containing a Si-O-Si bond. Siloxane has a skeletal structure formed by the bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O).
As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, as a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used. Note that contact holes are selectively formed in the insulating film 50503 and the insulating film 50505. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the impurity region of each transistor.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50505 as a drain electrode, a source electrode, and a wiring by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that, as the conductive film 50506, materials of Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W
, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, etc.
There are alloys of these elements. Alternatively, a stacked structure of these elements or an alloy of these elements can be used. Note that the conductive film 50506 and the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 of the transistor are connected to each other in portions where the contact holes of the insulating film 50503 and the insulating film 50505 are formed.

Next, over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505,
An insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film. Note that the insulating film 50507 is preferably formed using an organic material because it is desirable that the insulating film 50507 have high flatness and coverage.
Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride) to form a multilayer structure. A contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 50507. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed over the insulating film 50507 as a pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
Form an opening. The openings formed in the conductive film can incline liquid crystal molecules, and thus can play the same role as the projections in the MVA mode described in FIG. 25 of the sixth embodiment. Note that as the conductive film 50508, a transparent electrode which transmits light, for example, an indium tin oxide (ITO) film in which tin oxide is mixed with indium oxide, indium tin silicon in which silicon oxide is mixed with indium tin oxide (ITO) An oxide (ITSO) film, an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film in which zinc oxide is mixed with indium oxide, a zinc oxide film, a tin oxide film, or the like can be used. In addition, although IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using the target which mixed 2-20 wt% zinc oxide (ZnO) with ITO, it is not limited to this. In the case of a reflective electrode, for example, Ti, Mo, Ta
, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, G
It is possible to use e, etc. or their alloys. Alternatively, a two-layer structure in which Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W and Al are stacked, or a three-layer stack in which Al is sandwiched by metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W may be used.

Next, over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film.

Next, a sealant 50516 is formed by an inkjet method or the like in the peripheral portion of the pixel portion 50101 or in the peripheral portion of the pixel portion 50101 and the peripheral driver circuit portion.

Next, the substrate 50515 on which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion 50551, and the like are formed is attached to the substrate 50100 with the spacer 50531 interposed therebetween.
The liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in the gap. Note that the substrate 50105 functions as an opposite substrate. Further, the spacer 50531 may be provided by scattering particles of several μm, or after the resin film is formed on the entire surface of the substrate, the resin film may be formed by etching. The conductive film 50512 functions as a counter electrode. As the conductive film 50512, the same film as the conductive film 50508 can be used. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Next, a conductive film 505 electrically connected to the pixel portion 50101 and its peripheral driver circuit portion.
An FPC 50200 is disposed on the conductive layer 18 via an anisotropic conductive layer 50517. In addition, an IC chip 50530 is formed over the FPC 50200 with the anisotropic conductive layer 50517 interposed therebetween.
Is arranged. That is, the FPC 50200, the anisotropic conductive layer 50517, and the IC chip 50530 are electrically connected.

Note that the anisotropic conductive layer 50517 has a function of transmitting a signal input from the FPC 50200 and a potential to a pixel and a peripheral circuit. As the anisotropic conductive layer 50517, one similar to the conductive film 50506 may be used, or one similar to the conductive film 50504 may be used, or one similar to the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 is used. Or a combination of at least two or more layers may be used.

Note that the IC chip 50530 can effectively use a substrate area by forming a functional circuit (memory or buffer).

Although FIG. 26B illustrates a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be the PVA method. In the case of the PVA method, liquid crystal molecules may be inclined and aligned by providing a slit as described in FIG. 26 of Embodiment 6 with respect to the conductive film 50512 on the substrate 50515 (see FIG. 35). . Although FIG. 35 shows a structure in which a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512, a protrusion 50551 (also referred to as a protrusion for alignment control) may be provided over the conductive film provided with the slit to perform tilt alignment of liquid crystal molecules. Good (see Figure 36).

The liquid crystal panel in FIGS. 26A and 26B includes a scan line drive circuit 50105 a and a scan line drive circuit 5.
Although the structure in the case where the signal line driver circuit 50106 is formed over the substrate 50100 has been described, as shown in the liquid crystal panel in FIG.
A driver circuit corresponding to the above may be formed in the driver IC 50601 and mounted on a liquid crystal panel by a COG method or the like. Power saving can be achieved by forming the signal line driver circuit 50106 in the driver IC 50601. Further, by forming the driver IC 50601 as a semiconductor chip such as a silicon wafer, the liquid crystal panel in FIG. 27A can achieve higher speed and lower power consumption.

Similarly, as shown in the liquid crystal panel in FIG. 27B, driver ICs corresponding to the scan line driver circuit 50105a, the scan line driver circuit 50105b, and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are a driver IC 50602a, a driver IC 50602b, and a driver. The IC 50601 may be formed and mounted on a liquid crystal panel by a COG method or the like. In addition, cost reduction can be achieved by forming driver circuits corresponding to the scan line driver circuit 50105a, the scan line driver circuit 50105b, and the signal line driver circuit 50106 in the driver IC 50602a, the driver IC 50602b, and the driver IC 50601.

In FIG. 26, a cross-sectional view in the case where a top gate transistor is formed over a substrate 50100 has been described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where a bottom gate transistor is formed over the substrate 50100 and the display method is MVA will be described with reference to FIG. However, FIG. 28 shows only the pixel region 50526.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over a substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed over the insulating film 50501 as a gate electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 has a dual gate structure. This is because, as described above, the dual gate structure of the transistor 50521 can reduce the off-state current of the transistor 50521. However, on the channel region of the transistor,
It may have a plurality of gate electrodes. In addition, the conductive film 5050 of the transistor 50521
4 may be a single gate structure.

Next, an insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film over the insulating film 50501 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50501.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 is
The semiconductor film 50502 is doped with an impurity element using a resist as a mask, and a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed. Note that the impurity region may have a high concentration region and a low concentration region formed by controlling the impurity concentration.

Next, over the insulating film 50503 and over the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503, an insulating film 50505 is formed as an interlayer film. Note that the insulating film 50505
The contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the impurity region of each transistor.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50505 as a drain electrode, a source electrode, and a wiring by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that in the portion where the contact hole of the insulating film 50505 is formed, the conductive film 50506 and the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 of the transistor are connected.

Next, over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505, an insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film. Note that the insulating film 50507
The contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed over the insulating film 50507 as a pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
Form an opening. The openings formed in the conductive film can incline liquid crystal molecules, and thus can play the same role as the projections in the MVA mode described in FIG. 25 of the sixth embodiment.

Next, over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film.

Next, a liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in a gap between the substrate 50515 on which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion 50551, and the like are formed, and the substrate 50100. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Although FIG. 28 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. The configuration of the cross-sectional view in the PVA system is shown in FIG. A different point from FIG. 28 is that a conductive film 50512 is provided with a slit instead of the protrusion 50551. As the conductive film 50512 has a slit, unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511.
As in the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted and aligned.

In FIG. 26 and FIG. 28, the cross-sectional view in the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the flat film is described on the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505. However, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily required as shown in FIG.

Although the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 29 shows the case of a top gate type transistor, the same applies to a bottom gate type transistor and a double gate type transistor.

Although FIG. 29 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. The configuration of the cross-sectional view in the PVA system is shown in FIG. A different point from FIG. 29 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. As the conductive film 50512 has a slit, unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511.
As in the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted and aligned.

In FIGS. 26, 28, and 29, cross-sectional views in the case where a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film (polysilicon film) as a semiconductor film is formed over a substrate 50100 are described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor film (amorphous silicon film) as a semiconductor film is formed over a substrate 50100 will be described with reference to FIG.

The cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of a reverse stagger channel etch type transistor.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over a substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed over the insulating film 50501 as a gate electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, over the insulating film 50501 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50501,
An insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 is
The semiconductor film 50502 is doped with an impurity element, and an impurity region is formed over the entire surface of the semiconductor film 50502.

Next, the conductive film 50 is formed over the insulating film 50503 and the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
506 is formed. Note that in the semiconductor film 50502, a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed by etching using the conductive film 50506 as a mask.

Next, the insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarizing film over the insulating film 50503, the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503, and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50503 and the semiconductor film 50502. Is formed. A contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 50507. For example, the contact hole is a transistor 5
It is formed on the top surface of the 0521 drain electrode.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed over the insulating film 50507 as a pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
Form an opening. The openings formed in the conductive film can incline liquid crystal molecules, and thus can play the same role as the projections in the MVA mode described in FIG. 25 of the sixth embodiment.

Next, over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film.

Next, the substrate 5 is provided with the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion 50551, and the like.
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in a gap between the 0515 and the substrate 50100. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Although the channel-etched transistor is described, it may be a channel protective transistor.

Although FIG. 30 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. The configuration of the cross-sectional view in the PVA system is shown in FIG. A different point from FIG. 30 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. As the conductive film 50512 has a slit, unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511.
As in the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted and aligned.

In FIG. 30, a cross-sectional view in the case where a reverse staggered transistor is formed over a substrate 50100 has been described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where forward staggered transistors are formed over the substrate 50100 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over a substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50501 by a photolithography method, an ink jet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, over the conductive film 50506, a semiconductor film 50502a is formed by a photolithography method, an ink jet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 a can be formed using the same material and structure as the semiconductor film 50502. Further, an impurity element is doped into the semiconductor film 50502 a to form impurity regions to be source and drain regions.

Next, over the insulating film 50501 and the semiconductor film 50502a, the semiconductor film 50502b is formed by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
Note that the semiconductor film 50502 b can be formed using the same material and structure as the semiconductor film 50502. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 b is not doped with the impurity element, and a channel region is formed.

Next, over the insulating film 50501, the semiconductor film 50502b, and the conductive film 50506, an insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed over the insulating film 50503 as a gate electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, over the insulating film 50503 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50503, an insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film. Note that the insulating film 50507
The contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed over the insulating film 50507 as a pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film. An opening is formed in the conductive film 50508. The openings formed in the conductive film can incline liquid crystal molecules, and thus can play the same role as the projections in the MVA mode described in FIG. 25 of the sixth embodiment.

Next, the substrate 5 is provided with the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion 50551, and the like.
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in a gap between the 0515 and the substrate 50100. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Although FIG. 31 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. About the structure of sectional drawing by a PVA system, it shows in FIG. A different point from FIG. 31 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. As the conductive film 50512 has a slit, unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511.
As in the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted and aligned.

In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the cross-sectional view in the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the flat film is described over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505. However, as shown in FIG. 32, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily required.

Although the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 32 shows the case of a reverse stagger channel etch structure transistor, the same applies to a reverse stagger channel protection structure transistor.

Although FIG. 32 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. The configuration of the cross-sectional view in the PVA system is shown in FIG. A different point from FIG. 32 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. As the conductive film 50512 has a slit, unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511.
As in the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted and aligned.

The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method or the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and configuring one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention may be any display method in which liquid crystal molecules can be displayed with tilt alignment or radial tilt alignment in sub-pixels constituting one pixel, and for example, ferroelectric liquid crystals may be used. Or an antiferroelectric liquid crystal. Further, the driving method of the liquid crystal is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, and a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, an IPS (In)
-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric aligne)
d Micro-cell mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence) mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal mode, AFLC (AntiFerroelectric L)
Liquid Crystal) can be used. Further, the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal element, and may be a light emitting element (including organic EL or inorganic EL).

Further, in FIGS. 28 to 32, and 37 to 41, the cross-sectional view of the reflective or transmissive liquid crystal panel has been described. However, as described above, the liquid crystal panel of the present embodiment may be semi-transmissive. A cross-sectional view of the semi-transmissive liquid crystal panel is described with reference to FIG.

Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal panel when the transistor uses a polycrystalline semiconductor as a semiconductor film. However, the transistor may be a bottom gate type or a double gate type. In addition, the gate electrode of the transistor may have a single gate structure,
It may be a dual gate structure.

FIG. 65 is the same as FIG. 28 until the conductive film 50506 is formed. Accordingly, steps and structures after the conductive film 50506 is formed will be described.

First, on the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed on the insulating film 50505,
An insulating film 51801 is formed by a photolithography method, an ink jet method, a printing method, or the like as a film for reducing the thickness (cell gap to be called) of the liquid crystal layer 50510. Note that the insulating film 51801 is preferably formed using an organic material because it is desirable that the insulating film 51801 have good flatness and coverage. Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride) to form a multilayer structure.
A contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 51801. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, over the insulating film 50505 and the insulating film 50507, a conductive film 50508a is formed as a first pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that as the conductive film 50508 a, a transparent electrode which transmits light similar to the conductive film 50508 can be used.

Next, a conductive film 50508 b is formed over the conductive film 50508 a as a second pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. As the conductive film 50508 b, a reflective electrode which reflects light similar to the conductive film 50508 can be used. Note that a region where the conductive film 50508 b is formed is referred to as a reflective region. Also, the conductive film 5
Among the regions where 0508a is formed, a region where the conductive film 50508b is not formed on the conductive film 50508a is referred to as a transmission region.

Next, over the insulating film 51801, the conductive film 50508a, and the conductive film 50508b, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film.

Next, the insulating film 50514, the insulating film 50513, the conductive film 50512, and the insulating film 50511
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in a gap between the substrate 50515 formed with the above and the like and the substrate 50100. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film. In addition, the insulating film 505
13 are formed on the reflective region (on the conductive film 50508 b).

Although the conductive film 50508 b is formed after the conductive film 50508 a is formed in FIG. 65, the conductive film 50508 a may be formed after the conductive film 50508 b is formed.

In FIG. 65, the insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) is the conductive film 505.
It is formed under 08a and under the conductive film 50508b. However, as shown in FIG. 66, the insulating film 52001 may be formed on the substrate 50515 side. Similarly to the insulating film 51801, the insulating film 52001 is an insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap).

Although the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the planarization film has been described in FIG. 66, the insulating film 50507 may not be formed.

65 and 66 show the case where a polycrystalline semiconductor is used as a semiconductor film in the transistor. Next, FIG. 67 shows a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal panel in the case where a polycrystalline semiconductor is used as a semiconductor film in the transistor.

The cross-sectional view of FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal panel having a transistor using an inverted staggered channel etch structure. However, the transistor may be a forward stagger type or a reverse stagger type channel protection structure.

Note that FIG. 67 is similar to FIG. 30 until the conductive film 50506 is formed. Accordingly, steps and structures after the conductive film 50506 is formed will be described.

First, the liquid crystal layer 5 is formed on the semiconductor film 50502, the insulating film 50503, and the conductive film 50506.
An insulating film 52201 is formed by a photolithography method, an ink jet method, a printing method, or the like as a layer for reducing the thickness of 0510 (a so-called cell gap). Note that the insulating film 52201 is preferably formed using an organic material because planarity and coverage are desirably high. Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride) to form a multilayer structure. Note that contact holes are selectively formed in the insulating film 52201. For example, the contact hole is formed on the top surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, over the insulating film 50503 and the insulating film 52201, a conductive film 50508a is formed as a first pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, a conductive film 50508 b is formed over the conductive film 50508 a as a second pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that
The region where the conductive film 50508 b is formed is referred to as a reflective region. Further, in the region where the conductive film 50508 a is formed, the region where the conductive film 50508 b is not formed on the conductive film 50508 a is referred to as a transmission region.

Next, over the insulating film 52201, the conductive film 50508a, and the conductive film 50508b, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film.

Next, the insulating film 50514, the insulating film 50513, the conductive film 50512, and the insulating film 50511
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in a gap between the substrate 50515 formed with the above and the like and the substrate 50100. In addition, the insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film. In addition, the insulating film 505
13 are formed on the reflective region (on the conductive film 50508 b).

Note that although the conductive film 50508 b is formed after the conductive film 50508 a is formed in FIG. 67, the conductive film 50508 a may be formed after the conductive film 50508 b is formed.

In FIG. 67, the insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) is the conductive film 505.
It is formed under 08a and under the conductive film 50508b. However, as shown in FIG. 68, the insulating film 52001 may be formed on the substrate 50515 side. Similarly to the insulating film 52201, the insulating film 52001 is an insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap).

Although the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the planarization film is described in FIG. 68, the insulating film 50507 may not be formed.

32 and 34 to 42 show an example in which a pair of electrodes (a conductive film 50508 and a conductive film 50512) for applying a voltage to the liquid crystal layer 50510 are formed over different substrates. But,
The conductive film 50512 may be provided over the substrate 50100. Thus, an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode may be used as a liquid crystal driving method. In addition, depending on the liquid crystal layer 50510, two alignment films (the insulating film 50509 and the insulating film 505) may be formed.
The step of providing one or both of 11) can be omitted.

In FIGS. 28 to 32, 37 to 41, and 65 to 68, the conductive film 50508 (conductive film 50508 b) is formed as a reflective pixel electrode.
It is desirable that the shape of 8 be uneven. This is because the reflective pixel electrode is for reflecting external light to perform display. This is because external light that has entered the reflective electrode can be efficiently utilized and diffuse reflection can be performed by the reflective electrode in order to increase display brightness. In addition, the conductive film 5
The shape of the conductive film 50508 becomes uneven as the shape of the film (an insulating film 50505, the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 51801, or the insulating film 52201 or the like) under the lower layer 508 is made uneven.

Although some of them have already been mentioned, the wirings and electrodes are made of aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta
), Titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd),
Chromium (Cr), Nickel (Ni), Platinum (Pt), Gold (Au), Silver (Ag), Copper (Cu)
), Magnesium (Mg), scandium (Sc), cobalt (Co), nickel (Ni)
), Zinc (Zn), niobium (Nb), silicon (Si), phosphorus (P), boron (B), arsenic (As), gallium (Ga), indium (In), tin (Sn), oxygen (O) Or a compound or alloy material containing one or more elements selected from the group consisting of or one or more elements selected from the group (eg, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium) Zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide (ITSO) to which silicon oxide is added, zinc oxide (
It is formed of ZnO), aluminum neodymium (Al-Nd), magnesium silver (Mg-Ag) or the like, or a substance obtained by combining these compounds. Alternatively, they are formed using a compound (silicide) of them and silicon (eg, aluminum silicon, molybdenum silicon, nickel silicide, etc.) or a compound of them and nitrogen (eg, titanium nitride, tantalum nitride, molybdenum nitride, etc.) . Note that n-type impurities (silicon (Si)
A large amount of phosphorus etc.) or p-type impurities (boron etc.) may be contained. By including these impurities, the conductivity is improved, and the same behavior as a normal conductor is achieved, so that it becomes easy to use as a wiring or an electrode. Note that silicon may be single crystal, polycrystal (polysilicon), or amorphous (amorphous silicon). The resistance can be reduced by using single crystal silicon or polycrystalline silicon. By using amorphous silicon, it can be manufactured by a simple manufacturing process. Note that aluminum and silver have high conductivity, so that signal delay can be reduced and etching is easy, so patterning is easy and microfabrication can be performed. Since copper has high conductivity, signal delay can be reduced. Molybdenum can be manufactured without causing problems such as defects in materials even when it is in contact with oxide semiconductors such as ITO and IZO, or silicon, or it can be easily patterned or etched, and has high heat resistance. Because it is desirable. In addition, titanium is
Even when in contact with an oxide semiconductor such as ITO or IZO, or silicon, it can be manufactured without causing problems such as causing a defect of the material, or it is desirable because the heat resistance is high. Tungsten is desirable because of its high heat resistance. Neodymium is desirable because of its high heat resistance. In particular, when an alloy of neodymium and aluminum is used, it is desirable because heat resistance is improved and aluminum is less likely to cause hillocks. Note that silicon is preferable because silicon can be formed at the same time as a semiconductor layer included in a transistor or has high heat resistance. Note that indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide (ITSO) to which silicon oxide is added, zinc oxide (ZnO), and silicon (Si) have translucency. Because
It is desirable because it can be used in a part that transmits light. For example, it can be used as a pixel electrode or a common electrode.

In addition, these may form wiring and an electrode by a single | mono layer, and may have a multilayer structure. By forming a single layer structure, the manufacturing process can be simplified, the number of process days can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, by using a multi-layer structure, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages by utilizing the merits of the respective materials and to form wirings and electrodes with high performance. For example, by including a low-resistance material (such as aluminum) in the multilayer structure, the resistance of the wiring can be reduced. In addition, if a material having high heat resistance is included, for example, a material having low heat resistance but having another merit is formed into a laminated structure in which the material having another merit is sandwiched by materials having high heat resistance. As the heat resistance can be increased. For example, it is preferable to form a layered structure in which a layer containing aluminum is sandwiched between layers containing molybdenum and titanium. In addition, in the case where there is a portion in direct contact with a wire, an electrode, or the like of another material, they may adversely affect each other. For example, one material may be contained in the other material to change its properties, and it may not be able to fulfill its original purpose or may cause problems when it is manufactured and can not be manufactured normally. is there. In such a case, the problem can be solved by sandwiching or covering one layer with another layer.
For example, if it is desired to contact aluminum tin with indium tin oxide (ITO),
It is desirable to sandwich titanium and molybdenum. In addition, when silicon and aluminum are desired to be in contact, it is desirable to sandwich titanium or molybdenum therebetween.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Eighth Embodiment

In this embodiment mode, a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel of an MVA or PVA type liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are controlled to have various orientations and a viewing angle is increased by using alignment control protrusions. The figure will be described.

FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel in the case where thin film transistors (TFTs) are combined in an MVA liquid crystal display device. FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel, and FIG.
(B) is a top view of the pixel. In addition, the cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
This corresponds to the line segment a-a 'in the top view of the pixel shown in (B). By applying the present invention to a liquid crystal display device having a pixel structure shown in FIG. 33, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a large contrast can be obtained.

The pixel structure of the MVA liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a main part for displaying an image, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is
Two processed substrates are attached with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. In FIG. 33A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6001 and a second substrate 6016. A TFT and a pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate, and a light shielding film 6014, a color filter 6015, a fourth conductive layer 6013, a spacer 6017, a second alignment film 6012, and a second substrate are formed on the second substrate. Alignment control projection 6019
May be produced.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming a TFT on the first substrate 5901. TFT
When the present invention is carried out without making H, manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the TFT is manufactured to practice the present invention, a larger display can be obtained.

The TFT shown in FIG. 33 is a bottom gate type TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage that it can be manufactured inexpensively using a substrate with a large area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a structure of a TFT which can be used, there are a channel etch type, a channel protection type and the like in the bottom gate type TFT. In addition, it may be a top gate type. Furthermore, not only amorphous semiconductors but also polycrystalline semiconductors can be used.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the light shielding film 6014 on the second substrate 6016. When the present invention is carried out without forming the light shielding film 6014, the number of steps is reduced, whereby the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light shielding film 6014 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device with less light leakage can be obtained at the time of black display.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the color filter 6015 on the second substrate 6016. When the present invention is implemented without producing the color filter 6015, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the color filter 6015 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by dispersing spherical spacers without producing the spacers 6017 on the second substrate 6016. In the case of practicing the present invention by dispersing spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 6017 is manufactured to practice the present invention, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the positions of the spacers do not vary, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained. Can.

Next, processing to be performed on the first substrate 5901 will be described. The first substrate 5901 is preferably a light-transmitting substrate, and may be, for example, a quartz substrate, a glass substrate, or a plastic substrate. Note that the first substrate 5901 may be a light shielding substrate, and a semiconductor substrate, an SOI (Silic
It may be an on-on-insulator substrate.

First, the first insulating film 6002 may be formed over the first substrate 6001. First insulating film 60
The insulating film 02 may be an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy). Alternatively, an insulating film of a stacked structure in which at least two films of these films are combined may be used. In the case of forming the first insulating film 6002 to practice the present invention, it is possible to prevent the impurity from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the TFT. It is possible to obtain a high display device. First insulating film 60
When the present invention is carried out without forming the film 02, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved.

Next, a first conductive layer 6003 is formed over the first substrate 6001 or the first insulating film 6002. Note that the first conductive layer 6003 may be formed by processing a shape. The process of processing the shape is preferably as follows. First, a first conductive layer is formed on the entire surface. At this time, a deposition apparatus such as a sputtering apparatus or a CVD apparatus may be used. next,
A photosensitive resist material is formed on the entire surface on the first conductive layer formed on the entire surface. Next, the resist material is exposed according to the shape to be formed by photolithography or laser direct writing. Next, by removing either the exposed resist material or the unexposed resist material by etching, a mask for shaping the first conductive layer 6003 can be obtained. After that, the first conductive layer 6003 can be shaped into a desired pattern by etching and removing the first conductive layer 6003 in accordance with the formed mask pattern. Note that as a method of etching the first conductive layer 6003, there are a chemical method (wet etching) and a physical method (dry etching), but the material of the first conductive layer 6003 and the first method It is selected as appropriate in consideration of the property of the material in the lower layer of the conductive layer 6003 and the like. The material used for the first conductive layer 6003 is Mo
, Ti, Al, Nd, Cr and the like are preferable. Or these laminated structures may be sufficient. Furthermore, these alloys may be formed as a first conductive layer 6003 as a single layer or a stacked structure.

Next, a second insulating film 6004 is formed. At this time, a deposition apparatus such as a sputtering apparatus or a CVD apparatus may be used. Note that a material used for the second insulating film 6004 is preferably a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like. Or these laminated structures may be sufficient. Note that the second portion in contact with the first semiconductor layer 6005
It is particularly preferable that the insulating film 6004 be a silicon oxide film. This is because when the silicon oxide film is used, trap levels at the interface with the semiconductor layer 6005 are reduced. Note that when the first conductive layer 6003 is formed of Mo, the second insulating film 6004 in a portion in contact with the first conductive layer 6003 is preferably a silicon nitride film. It is a silicon nitride film M
It is because it does not oxidize o.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 6005 is formed. After that, it is preferable to form the second semiconductor layer 6006 continuously. Note that the first semiconductor layer 6005 and the second semiconductor layer 6006
May be formed by processing the shape. The step of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. Note that silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like is preferable as a material used for the first semiconductor layer 6005. As a material used for the second semiconductor layer 6006, silicon containing phosphorus or the like is preferable.

Next, a second conductive layer 6007 is formed. At this time, it is preferable to use a sputtering method or a printing method. Note that the material used for the second conductive layer 6007 has transparency,
It may have reflectivity. In the case of transparency, for example, an indium tin oxide (ITO) film obtained by mixing tin oxide with indium oxide, an indium tin silicon oxide (ITSO) film obtained by mixing silicon oxide with indium tin oxide (ITO), an oxide An indium zinc oxide (IZO) film in which zinc oxide is mixed with indium, a zinc oxide film, or a tin oxide film can be used. Note that IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which 2 to 20 wt% of zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with ITO. On the other hand, in the case of having reflectivity, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al or the like can be used. Also, T
i, Mo, Ta, Cr, a two-layer structure in which W and Al are laminated, Al is Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr
, W, etc. may be used as a three-layer laminated structure. Note that the second conductive layer 6007 may be formed by processing a shape. The method of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. Note that dry etching is preferably performed as the etching method. Dry etching is ECR (Electron Cycrotron R
The etching may be performed by a dry etching apparatus using a high density plasma source such as esonance or ICP (Inductive Coupled Plasma).

Next, a channel region of the TFT is formed. At this time, the second semiconductor layer 6006 may be etched using the second conductive layer 6007 as a mask. By this, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. By etching the conductive second semiconductor layer 6006, the removed portion becomes a channel region of the TFT. Note that the first semiconductor layer 6005 and the second semiconductor layer 6006 are not formed continuously.
After the formation of the first semiconductor layer 6005, a film to be a stopper may be formed and patterned in a portion to be a channel region of the TFT, and then the second semiconductor layer 6006 may be formed. By doing this, the channel region of the TFT can be formed without using the second conductive layer 6007 as a mask, so that there is an advantage that the degree of freedom of the layout pattern is increased. Further, since the first semiconductor layer 6005 is not etched when the second semiconductor layer 6006 is etched, there is an advantage that the channel region of the TFT can be surely formed without causing the etching failure.

Next, a third insulating film 6008 is formed. The third insulating film 6008 preferably has transparency. Note that the material used for the third insulating film 6008 is an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride or the like), an organic compound material with a low dielectric constant (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material), or the like. It is suitable. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane may be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeletal structure is formed by the bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Or as a substituent
An organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used. Second conductive layer 60
07 may be formed by processing the shape. The method of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. At this time, by etching the second insulating film 6004 at the same time, contact holes with the first conductive layer 6003 as well as the second conductive layer 6007 can be formed. Note that the surface of the third insulating film 6008 is preferably as flat as possible. That is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, a third conductive film 6009 is formed. At this time, it is preferable to use a sputtering method or a printing method. Note that the material used for the third conductive film 6009 may have transparency or reflectivity as in the case of the second conductive layer 6007. Note that the third conductive film 600
The material that can be used as 9 may be similar to that of the second conductive layer 6007. The third conductive film 6009 may be formed by processing the shape. The method of processing the shape is the second conductive layer 60
It may be the same as 07.

Next, a first alignment film 6010 is formed. For the alignment film 6010, a polymer film such as polyimide can be used. Although not shown, an orientation control protrusion may be provided on the side of the first substrate. Further, instead of the alignment control projection, a slit may be provided in the third conductive film 6009 to form unevenness on the surface of the first alignment film 6010. By so doing, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled more reliably. In addition, the first alignment film 6010 and the second alignment film 60
The alignment film 6012 may be a vertical alignment film. By this, the liquid crystal molecules 6018 can be vertically aligned.

The first substrate 6001 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6014, and the color filter 6015
And a second substrate 6016 having a fourth conductive layer 6013, a spacer 6017, and a second alignment film 6012 are attached with a gap of several μm by a sealing material, and a liquid crystal material is formed between the two substrates The liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. In the MVA liquid crystal panel as shown in FIG. 33, the fourth conductive layer 6013 may be formed on the entire surface of the second substrate 6016. In addition, the protrusion 6 for alignment control is in contact with the fourth conductive layer 6013.
019 may be produced. Although the shape of the alignment control projection 6019 is not limited, it is preferable that the alignment control projection 6019 has a smooth curved surface. By doing this, adjacent liquid crystal molecules 6018
Orientation is very close, so that orientation defects are reduced. Also, the second alignment film 6012 is
Defects in the alignment film, which are caused by the step breakage due to the alignment control projections 6019, can also be reduced.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the MVA liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 33A will be described. Liquid crystal molecules 6018 shown in FIG. 33A are long and thin molecules having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the direction of the liquid crystal molecule 6018, the length is shown in FIG. That is, it is assumed that the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 6018 represented long is parallel to the paper surface, and the direction of the major axis is closer to the normal direction of the paper surface as the liquid crystal molecule 6018 represented shorter . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6018 shown in FIG. 33A are aligned such that the direction of the major axis is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Accordingly, liquid crystal molecules 6018 in a portion where the alignment control projections 6019 are present are radially aligned about the alignment control projections 6019. By this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33B, an example of a pixel layout of the MVA liquid crystal display device will be described. The pixel of the MVA liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied is, for example,
The scanning line 6021, the first video signal line 6022A, the second video signal line 6022B, the capacitance line 6023, the first TFT 6024A, the second TFT 6024B, the first pixel electrode 6025A, and the second Pixel electrode 6025B, a pixel capacitor 6026, and an alignment control protrusion 6
And 019. Note that one pixel is formed by combining the first pixel electrode 6025A and the second pixel electrode 6025B. That is, the first pixel electrode 6025A corresponds to the first sub-pixel described in the above embodiment, and the second pixel electrode 6025B corresponds to the second sub-pixel described in the above embodiment. In addition, the sub-pixel signal from the first video signal line 6022A is
A series of operations such as inputting to the first pixel electrode 6025A through the FT 6024A will drive the first sub-pixel. Similarly, a series of operations such as inputting the sub-pixel signal from the second video signal line 6022B to the second pixel electrode 6025B through the second TFT 6024B drives the second sub-pixel. It becomes. Since the drive of the first sub-pixel and the drive of the second sub-pixel are the same, only the configuration of the first sub-pixel will be described below.

Since the scan line 6021 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the first TFT 6024A, the scan line 6021 is preferably formed of the first conductive layer 6003.

Since the first video signal line 6022A is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the first TFT 6024A, the first video signal line 6022A is preferably formed of the second conductive layer 6007.
In addition, since the scan lines 6021 and the first video signal lines 6022A are arranged in a matrix, it is preferable that at least a conductive layer in different layers be formed.

The capacitor line 6023 is disposed in parallel to the first pixel electrode 6025A, so that the pixel capacitor 60
The wiring 26 is preferably formed of the first conductive layer 6003. Note that as shown in FIG. 33B, the capacitor line 6023 is a first video signal line 6022A.
, And may be extended to surround the first video signal line 6022A. By so doing, it is possible to reduce the phenomenon that the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, with the potential change of the first video signal line 6022A. Note that in order to reduce the cross capacitance with the first video signal line 6022A, as shown in FIG. You may provide.

The first TFT 6024A operates as a switch for electrically connecting the first video signal line 6022A and the first pixel electrode 6025A. As shown in FIG. 33B, the first TFT 6 is
Either the source region or the drain region of 024A may be arranged to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing this, a large channel width can be obtained in a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. Note that FIG. 33 (B)
The gate electrode of the first TFT 6024A may be disposed to surround the first semiconductor layer 6005 as shown in FIG.

The first pixel electrode 6025A is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first TFT 6024A. The first pixel electrode 6025 A is connected to the first video signal line 6022.
It is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by A to the liquid crystal element. Also, the capacitance line 60
23 and the pixel capacitor 6026 may be formed. By doing this, the first video signal line 6022
It can also have the role of holding the signal voltage transmitted by A. The first pixel electrode 6025A may be rectangular as shown in FIG. By so doing, the aperture ratio of the pixels can be increased, and the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device is improved. Also, the first
When the pixel electrode 6025A is made of a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. Further, in the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is manufactured using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as the outdoors, and needs no backlight, so power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, it is possible to obtain a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device which has the advantages of both. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is manufactured using a reflective material, the surface of the first pixel electrode 6025A may have unevenness.
By doing this, the reflected light is irregularly reflected, which has the advantage of reducing the angular dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a constant brightness regardless of the angle.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, there are shown a sectional view and a top view of a pixel in the case of combining thin film transistors in a PVA type liquid crystal display device. 34A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel, and FIG. 34B is a top view of the pixel. In addition, the cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
This corresponds to the line segment a-a 'in the top view of the pixel shown in (B). By applying the present invention to a liquid crystal display device having a pixel structure shown in FIG. 34, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a large contrast.

The pixel structure of the PVA type liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a main part for displaying an image, which is called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 34A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6101 and a second substrate 6116. The TFT and the pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 6114, the color filter 6115, the fourth conductive layer 6113, the spacer 6117, and the second alignment film 6112 are formed on the second substrate. You may produce.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming a TFT on the first substrate 6101. TFT
When the present invention is carried out without making H, manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the TFT is manufactured to practice the present invention, a larger display can be obtained.

The TFT shown in FIG. 34 is a bottom gate type TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage that it can be manufactured inexpensively using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a structure of a TFT which can be used, there are a channel etch type, a channel protection type and the like in the bottom gate type TFT. In addition, it may be a top gate type. Furthermore, not only amorphous semiconductors but also polycrystalline semiconductors can be used.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the light shielding film 6114 on the second substrate 6116. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light shielding film 6114, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the light shielding film 6114 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device with less light leakage can be obtained at the time of black display.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the color filter 6115 on the second substrate 6116. In the case of implementing the present invention without producing the color filter 6115, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the color filter 6115 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by dispersing spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6117 on the second substrate 6116. In the case of practicing the present invention by dispersing spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 6117 is manufactured to practice the present invention, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the positions of the spacers do not vary, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained. Can.

Next, the process to be performed on the first substrate 6101 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6101, the first insulating film 6102, the first conductive layer 6
103, second insulating film 6104, first semiconductor layer 6105, second semiconductor layer 6106, second conductive layer 6107, third insulating film 6108, third conductive layer 6109, first alignment film 61
In FIG. 33, the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG.
And the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010. Note that an electrode notch portion may be provided in the third conductive layer 6109 on the first substrate 6101 side. By so doing, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled more reliably. The first alignment film 6110 and the second alignment film 6112 may be vertical alignment films. By this, the liquid crystal molecules 6118 can be vertically aligned.

The first substrate 6101 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6114, and the color filter 6115
And a second substrate 6116 on which the fourth conductive layer 6113, the spacer 6117, and the second alignment film 6112 are manufactured, with a sealing material having a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material between the two substrates The liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. In the liquid crystal panel of PVA type as shown in FIG. 34, the fourth conductive layer 6113 may be patterned to form the electrode notch portion 6119. Although the shape of the electrode notch 6119 is not limited, it is preferable that the shape is a combination of a plurality of rectangles having different directions.
By this, a plurality of regions with different orientations can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle can be obtained. The shape of the fourth conductive layer 6113 at the boundary between the electrode notch portion 6119 and the fourth conductive layer 6113 is preferably a smooth curve. By so doing, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 6118 becomes very close, so that the alignment failure is reduced. In addition, defects in the alignment film can also be reduced because the second alignment film 6112 is cut off due to the electrode notch portion 6119.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the liquid crystal panel of the PVA type shown in FIG. 34 will be described. Figure 3
The liquid crystal molecules 6118 shown in (A) of 4 are elongated molecules having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the orientation of the liquid crystal molecule 6118, in FIG. 34A, it is expressed by its length. That is, it is assumed that the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 6118 represented long is parallel to the paper surface, and the direction of the major axis is closer to the normal direction of the paper surface as the liquid crystal molecule 6118 represented shorter . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6118 shown in FIG. 34A are aligned such that the direction of the major axis is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Accordingly, liquid crystal molecules 6118 in a portion where the electrode notch portion 6119 is radially aligned around the boundary between the electrode notch portion 6119 and the fourth conductive layer 6113. By this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34B, an example of a pixel layout of a liquid crystal display device of a PVA type will be described. The pixel of the liquid crystal display device of the PVA system to which the present invention is applied is, as an example,
The scanning line 6121, the first video signal line 6122A, the second video signal line 6122B, the capacitance line 6123, the first TFT 6124A, the second TFT 6124B, the first pixel electrode 6125A, and the second Pixel electrode 6125 B, a pixel capacitor 6126, and an electrode notch 6
And 119. Note that one pixel is formed by combining the first pixel electrode 6125A and the second pixel electrode 6125B. That is, the first pixel electrode 6025A corresponds to the first sub-pixel described in the above embodiment, and the second pixel electrode 6025B corresponds to the second sub-pixel described in the above embodiment. In addition, the sub-pixel signal from the first video signal line 6122A is
A series of operations such as inputting to the first pixel electrode 6125A through the FT 6124A will drive the first sub-pixel. Similarly, a series of operations such as inputting the sub-pixel signal from the second video signal line 6122B to the second pixel electrode 6125B via the second TFT 6124B drives the second sub-pixel. It becomes. Since the drive of the first sub-pixel and the drive of the second sub-pixel are the same, only the configuration of the first sub-pixel will be described below.

Since the scan line 6121 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the first TFT 6124A, the scan line 6121 is preferably formed of the first conductive layer 6103.

Since the first video signal line 6122A is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the first TFT 6124A, the first video signal line 6122A is preferably formed of the second conductive layer 6107.
In addition, since the scan lines 6121 and the first video signal lines 6122A are arranged in a matrix, it is preferable that at least a conductive layer in different layers be formed.

The capacitance line 6123 is disposed in parallel to the first pixel electrode
26 is preferably a wiring for forming the first conductive layer 6103. As shown in FIG. 34B, the capacitor line 6123 is a first video signal line 6122A.
May be extended to surround the first video signal line 6122A. By this, it is possible to reduce a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode to hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, in accordance with the potential change of the first video signal line 6122A. Note that in order to reduce the cross capacitance with the first video signal line 6122A, as shown in FIG. 34B, the first semiconductor layer 6105 is formed in the crossing region of the capacitance line 6123 and the first video signal line 6122A. You may provide.

The first TFT 6124A operates as a switch for electrically connecting the first video signal line 6122A and the first pixel electrode 6125A. As shown in FIG. 34B, the first TFT 6 is
Either the source region or the drain region of 124 A may be arranged to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing this, a large channel width can be obtained in a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. Note that FIG. 34 (B)
The gate electrode of the first TFT 6124A may be arranged to surround the first semiconductor layer 6105, as shown in FIG.

The first pixel electrode 6125A is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first TFT 6124A. The first pixel electrode 6125 A is connected to the first video signal line 6122.
It is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by A to the liquid crystal element. Also, the capacitance line 61
23 and the pixel capacitor 6126 may be formed. By doing this, the first video signal line 6122
It can also have the role of holding the signal voltage transmitted by A. Note that the first pixel electrode 6125A is, according to the shape of the electrode notch 6119 provided in the fourth conductive layer 6113, in a portion where the electrode notch 6119 is not provided, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to form a cutaway portion of the first pixel electrode 6125A. By doing this, the liquid crystal molecules 61
Since a plurality of regions of 18 different orientations can be formed, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle can be obtained. In addition, in the case where the first pixel electrode 6125A is formed of a material having transparency, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In addition, the first pixel electrode 61
When 25A is made of a material having reflectivity, a reflective liquid crystal display can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as the outdoors, and needs no backlight, so power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6125A is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, it is possible to obtain a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device having the advantages of both. In addition, the first
When the pixel electrode 6125A is made of a reflective material, the first pixel electrode 6125 is used.
The surface of A may have irregularities. By doing this, the reflected light is irregularly reflected, which has the advantage of reducing the angular dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a constant brightness regardless of the angle.

The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method or the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and configuring one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention may be any display method in which liquid crystal molecules can be displayed with tilt alignment or radial tilt alignment in sub-pixels constituting one pixel, and for example, ferroelectric liquid crystals may be used. Or an antiferroelectric liquid crystal. Further, the driving method of the liquid crystal is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, and a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, an IPS (In)
-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric aligne)
d Micro-cell mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence) mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal mode, AFLC (AntiFerroelectric L)
Liquid Crystal) can be used. Further, the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal element, and may be a light emitting element (including organic EL or inorganic EL).

As an example, FIG. 69 shows a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel in the case where a thin film transistor (TFT) is combined with a so-called TN method in a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device. 69A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel, and FIG. 69B is a top view of a sub-pixel constituting the pixel. In addition, the cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in (A) of FIG. 69 corresponds to the line segment aa ′ in the top view of the sub-pixel shown in (B) of FIG.

The pixel structure of the TN liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a main part for displaying an image, which is called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is
Two processed substrates are attached with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. In FIG. 69A, the two substrates are a first substrate 5901 and a second substrate 5916. The TFT and the pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 5914, the color filter 5915, the fourth conductive layer 5913, the spacer 5917, and the second alignment film 5912 are formed on the second substrate. You may produce.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming a TFT on the first substrate 5901. TFT
When the present invention is carried out without making H, manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the TFT is manufactured to practice the present invention, a larger display can be obtained.

The TFT shown in FIG. 69 is a bottom gate type TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage that it can be manufactured inexpensively using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a structure of a TFT which can be used, there are a channel etch type, a channel protection type and the like in the bottom gate type TFT. In addition, it may be a top gate type. Furthermore, not only amorphous semiconductors but also polycrystalline semiconductors can be used.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the light shielding film 5914 on the second substrate 5916. In the case of implementing the present invention without forming the light shielding film 5914, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light shielding film 5914 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device with less light leakage can be obtained at the time of black display.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the color filter 5915 on the second substrate 5916. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the color filter 5915, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the color filter 5915 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by dispersing spherical spacers without forming the spacers 5917 on the second substrate 5916. In the case of practicing the present invention by dispersing spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 5917 is manufactured to practice the present invention, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the positions of the spacers do not vary, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained. Can.

Next, the process to be performed on the first substrate 5901 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 5901, the first insulating film 5902, the first conductive layer 5
903, second insulating film 5904, first semiconductor layer 5905, second semiconductor layer 5906, second conductive layer 5907, third insulating film 5908, third conductive layer 5909, first alignment film 59
In FIG. 33, the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG.
And the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010.

The first substrate 5901 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 5914, and the color filter 5915
And a second substrate 5916 having a fourth conductive layer 5913, a spacer 5917, and a second alignment film 5912 are attached to each other with a gap of several μm by a sealing material, and a liquid crystal material is formed between the two substrates. The liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. In the TN liquid crystal panel as shown in FIG. 69, the fourth conductive layer 5913 may be formed on the entire surface of the second substrate 5916.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the TN liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 69 will be described. Figure 69
The liquid crystal molecules 6918 shown in (A) are elongated molecules having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 6918, the length is shown in FIG. That is, the orientation of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 5918 expressed long is parallel to the paper surface,
It is assumed that the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 5918 expressed as short as possible is closer to the normal direction of the paper. That is, the directions of the major axes of the liquid crystal molecules 5918 shown in FIG. 69A differ from those near the first substrate 5901 and those near the second substrate 5916 by 90 degrees. The orientation of the major axes of the liquid crystal molecules 5918 located in the middle of the orientations is such that they are connected smoothly. That is, liquid crystal molecules 5918 shown in FIG. 69A are in an alignment state where they are twisted by 90 degrees between the first substrate 5901 and the second substrate 5916.

Next, referring to FIG. 69 (B), the present invention is applied to a TN liquid crystal display device,
An example of the layout of the pixels will be described. A pixel of a TN liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied includes a scanning line 5921, a video signal line 5922, a capacitor line 5923, and a TFT 5924.
, The pixel electrode 5925, and the pixel capacitor 5926 may be provided.

Since the scan line 5921 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 5924, the scan line 5921 preferably includes the first conductive layer 5903.

Since the video signal line 5922 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 5924, the video signal line 5922 preferably includes the second conductive layer 5907. Also, scan line 59
21 and the video signal lines 5922 are arranged in a matrix, and therefore are preferably formed of at least conductive layers of different layers.

The capacitor line 5923 is a wiring for forming the pixel capacitor 5926 by being disposed in parallel to the pixel electrode 5925, and preferably includes the first conductive layer 5903. Note that as illustrated in FIG. 69B, the capacitor line 5923 may be extended along the video signal line 5922 so as to surround the video signal line 5922. By doing this, the video signal line 592
It is possible to reduce a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode to hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, along with the potential change of 2. Note that in order to reduce the cross capacitance with the video signal line 5922, as shown in FIG. 69B, the first semiconductor layer 5905 may be provided in the cross region of the capacitor line 5923 and the video signal line 5922.

The TFT 5924 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 5922 and the pixel electrode 5925. Note that as shown in FIG. 69B, either one of the source region or the drain region of the TFT 5924 may be disposed so as to surround the other of the source region and the drain region. By doing this, a large channel width can be obtained in a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 69B, the TFT 5924
The gate electrode of may be disposed to surround the first semiconductor layer 5905.

The pixel electrode 5925 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 5924. The pixel electrode 5925 is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 5922 to the liquid crystal element. In addition, a capacitor line 5923 and a pixel capacitor 5926 may be formed. By doing this, it can also have a role of holding the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 5922. The pixel electrode 5925 may be rectangular as shown in FIG. By so doing, the aperture ratio of the pixels can be increased, and the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device is improved. In addition, in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is manufactured using a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In addition, in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is manufactured using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as the outdoors, and needs no backlight, so power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained which has the advantages of both. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 5925 may have unevenness. By doing this, the reflected light is irregularly reflected, which has the advantage of reducing the angular dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a constant brightness regardless of the angle.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the case where the present invention is applied to a lateral electric field liquid crystal display device will be described. FIG. 70 shows a pixel electrode 622 of a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device in which an electric field is applied in a lateral direction in order to perform switching so that the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is always horizontal to the substrate.
5 and a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where the present invention is applied to a method of applying an electric field in a lateral direction by processing a comb-like pattern on the common electrode 6223, so-called IPS (In-Plane-Switching) method. It is a top view. (A) of FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of a pixel, and FIG.
(B) is a top view of the pixel. In addition, the cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
It corresponds to line segment a-a 'in the top view of the pixel shown to (B) of. By applying the present invention to a liquid crystal display device having a pixel structure shown in FIG. 70, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle and small gradation dependency of response speed in principle.

The pixel structure of an IPS liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a main part for displaying an image, which is called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 70A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6201 and a second substrate 6216. The TFT and the pixel electrode may be formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 6214, the color filter 6215, the spacer 6217, and the second alignment film 6212 may be formed on the second substrate.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming a TFT on the first substrate 6201. TFT
When the present invention is carried out without making H, manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the TFT is manufactured to practice the present invention, a larger display can be obtained.

Note that the TFT shown in FIG. 70 is a bottom gate type TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage that it can be manufactured inexpensively using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a structure of a TFT which can be used, there are a channel etch type, a channel protection type and the like in the bottom gate type TFT. In addition, it may be a top gate type. Furthermore, not only amorphous semiconductors but also polycrystalline semiconductors can be used.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the light shielding film 6214 on the second substrate 6216. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light shielding film 6214, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light shielding film 6214 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device with less light leakage can be obtained at the time of black display.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the color filter 6215 on the second substrate 6216. In the case of implementing the present invention without producing the color filter 6215, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the color filter 6215 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by dispersing spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6217 on the second substrate 6216. In the case of practicing the present invention by dispersing spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case of manufacturing the spacer 6217 and practicing the present invention, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the positions of the spacers do not vary, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained. Can.

Next, the process to be performed on the first substrate 6201 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6201, the first insulating film 6202, the first conductive layer 6
203, second insulating film 6204, first semiconductor layer 6205, second semiconductor layer 6206, second conductive layer 6207, third insulating film 6208, third conductive layer 6209, first alignment film 62
In FIG. 33, the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG.
And the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010. Note that the third conductive layer 6209 on the first substrate 6201 side may be patterned to form two comb-like shapes interdigitated with each other. In addition, one comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to one of the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6224, and the other comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to the common electrode 6223. By this, a lateral electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6218.

The first substrate 6201 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6214, and the color filter 6215
The second substrate 6216 having the spacer 6217 and the second alignment film 6212 prepared is attached with a gap of several μm by a sealing material, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates to obtain a liquid crystal. Panel can be made. Although not shown, on the second substrate 6216 side,
A conductive layer may be formed. By forming a conductive layer on the second substrate 6216 side, the influence of electromagnetic noise from the outside can be reduced.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the liquid crystal panel of the IPS system shown in FIG. 70 will be described. Figure 7
The liquid crystal molecule 6218 shown in (A) of 0 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 6218, in FIG. 70A, it is expressed by its length. That is, it is assumed that the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 6218 represented long is parallel to the paper surface, and the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 6218 represented shorter is closer to the normal direction of the paper . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6218 shown in FIG. 70A are aligned so that the direction of the major axis is always horizontal to the substrate. FIG. 70A shows the alignment in the absence of an electric field, but when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6218, the direction of the major axis always keeps the horizontal direction with the substrate. Rotate within. By this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70B, an example of a pixel layout in the case where the present invention is applied to an IPS liquid crystal display device will be described. The pixel of the liquid crystal display device of the IPS system to which the present invention is applied includes a scanning line 6221, a video signal line 6222, a common electrode 6223, and a TFT 6.
And the pixel electrode 6225.

Since the scan line 6221 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 6224, the scan line 6221 is preferably formed of the first conductive layer 6203.

The video signal line 6222 is preferably connected to the second conductive layer 6207 because it is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6224. Also, the scanning line 62
21 and the video signal lines 6222 are arranged in a matrix, and are preferably formed of at least conductive layers of different layers. As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the video signal line 6 is
The portion 222 may be bent in the pixel so as to conform to the shapes of the pixel electrode 6225 and the common electrode 6223. By doing this, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device can be improved.

The common electrode 6223 is an electrode for generating an electric field in the lateral direction by being disposed in parallel to the pixel electrode 6225, and is configured of the first conductive layer 6203 and the third conductive layer 6209. It is suitable. As shown in FIG. 70B, the common electrode 6223 may be extended along the video signal line 6222 so as to surround the video signal line 6222. By so doing, it is possible to reduce the phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, in accordance with the potential change of the video signal line 6222. Note that, as shown in FIG. 70B, the first semiconductor layer 6205 may be provided in the intersection region of the common electrode 6223 and the video signal line 6222 in order to reduce the cross capacitance with the video signal line 6222.

The TFT 6224 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 6222 and the pixel electrode 6225. Note that as shown in FIG. 70B, either one of the source region or the drain region of the TFT 6224 may be disposed so as to surround the other of the source region and the drain region. By doing this, a large channel width can be obtained in a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 70B, the TFT 6224
The gate electrode of may be disposed to surround the first semiconductor layer 6205.

The pixel electrode 6225 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 6224. The pixel electrode 6225 is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 6222 to the liquid crystal element. In addition, the pixel capacitor may be formed with the common electrode 6223. By doing this, it can also have a role of holding the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 6222. It is preferable that the pixel electrode 6225 and the common electrode 6223 having a comb shape be formed in a bent comb shape as shown in FIG. 70B. Accordingly, a plurality of regions in which the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 6218 is different can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained. Further, in the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6223 are formed of a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. Further, in the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as the outdoors, and needs no backlight, so power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6223 are formed using both a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity, a semi-transmission liquid crystal display device having the advantages of both of them is provided. You can get it. Note that
In the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6223 are formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6223 may have unevenness.
By doing this, the reflected light is irregularly reflected, which has the advantage of reducing the angular dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a constant brightness regardless of the angle.

Although both the comb-tooth-shaped pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6223 are formed of the third conductive layer 6209, the pixel configuration to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to this. It can be selected appropriately. For example, a comb-shaped pixel electrode 6225 and a comb-shaped common electrode 6
The second conductive layer 6207 and the first conductive layer 620 may be both formed.
3 or one of them may be formed of the third conductive layer 6209 and the other may be formed of the second conductive layer 6207, or one of them may be formed of the third conductive layer 6209. The other may be formed of the first conductive layer 6207, or either one may be formed of the second conductive layer 6209 and the other may be formed of the first conductive layer 6207.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the case where the present invention is applied to another horizontal electric field liquid crystal display device will be described. FIG. 71 is a view showing another pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device in which an electric field is applied in a lateral direction in order to perform switching so that the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is always horizontal to the substrate. More specifically, one of the pixel electrode 6325 and the common electrode 6323 is subjected to a comb-like pattern processing, and the other is uniformly formed in a region overlapping the comb-like shape.
Method to apply an electric field in the lateral direction, so-called FFS (Fringe Field Switch)
FIG. 6A is a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel when the present invention is applied to the ing) method. Figure 71 (A
Is a cross-sectional view of the pixel, and FIG. 71 (B) is a top view of the pixel. In addition,
The cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in A) corresponds to a line segment a-a 'in the top view of the pixel shown in (B) of FIG. By applying the present invention to a liquid crystal display device having a pixel structure shown in FIG.
In principle, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle and a small dependency of response speed on gradation.

The pixel structure of the FFS liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a main part for displaying an image, which is called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 71A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6301 and a second substrate 6316. The TFT and the pixel electrode may be formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 6314, the color filter 6315, the spacer 6317, and the second alignment film 6312 may be formed on the second substrate.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming a TFT on the first substrate 6301. TFT
When the present invention is carried out without making H, manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the TFT is manufactured to practice the present invention, a larger display can be obtained.

The TFT shown in FIG. 71 is a bottom gate type TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage that it can be manufactured inexpensively using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a structure of a TFT which can be used, there are a channel etch type, a channel protection type and the like in the bottom gate type TFT. In addition, it may be a top gate type. Furthermore, not only amorphous semiconductors but also polycrystalline semiconductors can be used.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the light shielding film 6314 on the second substrate 6316. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light shielding film 6314, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light shielding film 6314 is manufactured to practice the present invention, a display device with little light leakage can be obtained at the time of black display.

Note that the present invention can be practiced without forming the color filter 6315 on the second substrate 6316. In the case where the present invention is implemented without producing the color filter 6315, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case of manufacturing the color filter 6315 to practice the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by dispersing spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6317 on the second substrate 6316. In the case of practicing the present invention by dispersing spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case of manufacturing the spacer 6317 to practice the present invention, since the positions of the spacers do not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained. Can.

Next, the processing to be performed on the first substrate 6301 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6301, the first insulating film 6302, and the first conductive layer 6
303, second insulating film 6304, first semiconductor layer 6305, second semiconductor layer 6306, second conductive layer 6307, third insulating film 6308, third conductive layer 6309, first alignment film 63
In FIG. 33, the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG.
And the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010.

However, the point different from FIG. 33 is that the fourth insulating film 6319 and the fourth conductive layer 6313 may be formed on the first substrate 6301 side. More specifically, the third conductive layer 63
After patterning was performed on 09, a fourth insulating film 6319 was formed and patterned to form a contact hole, and then a fourth conductive layer 6313 was formed and similarly patterned. After that, a first alignment film 6310 may be formed. Note that materials and processing methods that can be used for the fourth insulating film 6319 and the fourth conductive layer 6313 can be similar to those used for the third insulating film 6308 and the third conductive layer 6309. In addition, one comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to one of the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6324, and the other uniform electrode may be electrically connected to the common electrode 6323. By this, a lateral electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6318.

The first substrate 6301 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6314, and the color filter 6315
, A spacer 6317 and a second alignment film 6312 are attached to each other with a seal material having a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates to obtain a liquid crystal. Panel can be made. Although not shown, on the second substrate 6316 side,
A conductive layer may be formed. By forming the conductive layer on the second substrate 6316 side, the influence of electromagnetic noise from the outside can be reduced.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the FFS liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 71 will be described. Figure 7
The liquid crystal molecules 6318 shown in (A) of 1 are elongated molecules having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to indicate the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6318, in FIG. 71A, it is expressed by its length. That is, it is assumed that the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 6318 represented long is parallel to the paper surface, and the direction of the major axis is closer to the normal direction of the paper surface as the liquid crystal molecule 6318 represented shorter . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6318 shown in FIG. 71A are aligned such that the direction of the major axis is always horizontal to the substrate. FIG. 71A shows the alignment in the absence of an electric field, but when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6318, the direction of the major axis is always horizontal with the substrate, Rotate within. By this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71B, an example of the layout of pixels in the case where the present invention is applied to an FFS liquid crystal display device will be described. The pixels of the FFS liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied include a scanning line 6321, a video signal line 6322, a common electrode 6323, and a TFT 6
324 and the pixel electrode 6325 may be provided.

Since the scan line 6321 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 6324, the scan line 6321 is preferably formed of the first conductive layer 6303.

Since the video signal line 6322 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6324, the video signal line 6322 is preferably formed of the second conductive layer 6307. Also, scan line 63
21 and the video signal lines 6322 are arranged in a matrix, it is preferable that at least conductive layers of different layers be formed. As shown in FIG. 71B, the video signal line 6 is
The reference numeral 322 may be bent in the pixel so as to conform to the shape of the pixel electrode 6325. By doing this, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device can be improved.

The common electrode 6323 is an electrode for generating an electric field in the lateral direction by being disposed in parallel to the pixel electrode 6325, and is configured of the first conductive layer 6303 and the third conductive layer 6309. It is suitable. As shown in FIG. 71B, the common electrode 6323 may be formed in a shape along the video signal line 6322. By doing this, the video signal line 63
It is possible to reduce a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode to hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, with the potential change of 22. Note that, as shown in FIG. 71B, the first semiconductor layer 6305 is connected to the common electrode 6323 in order to reduce the cross capacitance with the video signal line 6322.
And the video signal line 6322 may be provided.

The TFT 6324 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 6322 and the pixel electrode 6325. Note that as shown in FIG. 71B, either one of the source region and the drain region of the TFT 6324 may be disposed so as to surround the other of the source region and the drain region. By doing this, a large channel width can be obtained in a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 71B, the TFT 6324 is
The gate electrode of may be disposed to surround the first semiconductor layer 6305.

The pixel electrode 6325 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 6324. The pixel electrode 6325 is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 6322 to the liquid crystal element. In addition, a pixel capacitor may be formed with the common electrode 6323. By so doing, it can also have a role of holding the signal voltage transmitted by the video signal line 6322. Note that as shown in FIG. 71B, the pixel electrode 6325 is preferably formed as a bent comb-like shape. By this, a plurality of regions in which the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 6318 is different can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle can be obtained. In addition, in the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6323 are formed of a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6323 are formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as the outdoors, and needs no backlight, so power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6323 are formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device having the advantages of both is obtained. You can get it. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6323 are formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-tooth-shaped common electrode 6323 may have unevenness. By doing this, the reflected light is irregularly reflected, which has the advantage of reducing the angular dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a constant brightness regardless of the angle.

Although the comb-tooth-shaped pixel electrode 6325 is formed of the fourth conductive layer 6313 and the uniform common electrode 6323 is formed of the third conductive layer 6309, the pixel configuration to which the present invention can be applied Is not limited to this, and may be appropriately selected as long as certain conditions are satisfied. More specifically, as viewed from the first substrate 6301, the comb-like electrode may be positioned closer to the liquid crystal than the uniform electrode. This is because the lateral electric field always occurs in the opposite direction to the uniform electrode when viewed from the comb-like electrode. That is, in order to apply a lateral electric field to the liquid crystal, the comb-like electrodes must be positioned more to the liquid crystal than to the uniform electrodes.

In order to satisfy this condition, for example, the comb-like electrode may be formed of the fourth conductive layer 6313, and the uniform electrode may be formed of the third conductive layer 6309, or the comb-like electrode may be formed. Fourth conductive layer 631
3 and the uniform electrode may be formed by the second conductive layer 6307, or the comb-like electrode may be formed by the fourth conductive layer 6313, and the uniform electrode may be formed by the first conductive layer It may be formed by 6303,
A comb-like electrode may be formed of the third conductive layer 6309, a uniform electrode may be formed of the second conductive layer 6307, or a comb-like electrode is formed of the third conductive layer 6309. A uniform electrode may be formed of the first conductive layer 6303, or a comb-like electrode may be formed of the second conductive layer 6307, and a uniform electrode may be formed of the first conductive layer 6303. May be Note that the comb-like electrode has a TFT 632
Although it is electrically connected to one of the source region or the drain region 4 and the uniform electrode is electrically connected to the common electrode 6323, this connection may be reversed. In that case, uniform electrodes may be formed independently for each pixel.

As an example, referring to FIG. 72 (A), as a display device using a light emitting element, one pixel is
It is an example of the top view (layout diagram) of the pixel which has two transistors. FIG. 72 (B) is an example of a cross-sectional view of the portion XX ′ shown in FIG. 72 (A).

In FIG. 72A, a first transistor 60105, a first wiring 60106, and a second wiring 6 are illustrated.
, Second transistor 60108, third wiring 60111, counter electrode 60112
, Capacitor 60113, pixel electrode 60115, partition wall 60116, organic conductive film 6011
7, an organic thin film 60118 and a substrate 60119 are shown. Note that the first transistor 6
0105 is a switching transistor, the first wiring 60106 is a gate signal line, the second wiring 60107 is a source signal line, the second transistor 60108 is a driving transistor, and the third wiring 60111 is a current supply line It is preferred that each be used.

The gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60106, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60107, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is the gate electrode of the second transistor 60108 and the capacitor 60113.
It is electrically connected to one of the electrodes. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 is formed of a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60105 can be reduced.

One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is a third wiring 60.
The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60115. Thus, the current flowing to the pixel electrode 60115 can be controlled by the second transistor 60108.

An organic conductive film 60117 is provided on the pixel electrode 60115, and an organic thin film 601 is further provided.
18 (organic compound layer) is provided. On the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer),
An opposing electrode 60112 is provided. Note that the counter electrode 60112 may be formed on one surface so as to be commonly connected to all the pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.

Light emitted from the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60115 or the counter electrode 60112 and emitted.

In FIG. 72B, the case where light is emitted to the pixel electrode side, that is, the side on which a transistor or the like is formed is referred to as bottom emission, and the case where light is emitted to the counter electrode side is referred to as top emission.

In the case of bottom emission, the pixel electrode 60115 is preferably formed of a transparent conductive film.
On the contrary, in the case of top emission, the counter electrode 60112 is preferably formed of a transparent conductive film.

In a light emitting device for color display, EL elements having respective emission colors of R, G and B may be separately painted, or a single color EL element is coated on one surface, and light emission of R, G and B is obtained by a color filter. You may do so.

The configuration shown in FIG. 72 is merely an example, and various configurations can be taken other than the configuration shown in FIG. 72 regarding the pixel layout, the cross-sectional configuration, the stacking order of the electrodes of the EL element, and the like. Further, as the light emitting layer, various elements such as a crystalline element such as an LED or an element constituted by an inorganic thin film can be used in addition to the element constituted by the illustrated organic thin film.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Alternatively, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be configured by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 9)

In the present embodiment, a method of driving a display device will be described. In particular, a method of driving a liquid crystal display device is described.

The liquid crystal panel that can be used for the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment has a structure in which a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between two substrates. The two substrates each include an electrode for controlling an electric field applied to the liquid crystal material. A liquid crystal material is a material whose optical and electrical properties are changed by an externally applied electric field. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel
It is a device capable of obtaining desired optical and electrical properties by controlling a voltage applied to a liquid crystal material using an electrode of a substrate. Then, by arranging a large number of electrodes in parallel in plan, each can be used as a pixel, and by individually controlling the voltage applied to the pixel, a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a fine image can be obtained.

Here, the response time of the liquid crystal material to the change of the electric field is the distance between the two substrates (cell gap)
And depending on the type of liquid crystal material, etc., but generally several milliseconds to several tens of milliseconds. Furthermore, when the amount of change in the electric field is small, the response time of the liquid crystal material is further increased. This property causes an obstacle in image display such as afterimage, tailing and a drop in contrast when displaying a moving image by a liquid crystal panel, particularly when changing from half tone to another half tone The degree of the above-mentioned failure becomes remarkable when

On the other hand, as a problem unique to liquid crystal panels using an active matrix, there is a change in write voltage due to constant charge driving. The constant charge drive in the present embodiment will be described below.

The pixel circuit in the active matrix includes a switch that controls writing and a capacitive element that holds a charge. The driving method of the pixel circuit in the active matrix is such that after the switch is turned on and a predetermined voltage is written to the pixel circuit, the switch is immediately turned off to hold the charge in the pixel circuit (hold state). In the hold state, charge exchange is not performed between the inside and the outside of the pixel circuit (constant charge). Generally, the period in which the switch is off is about several hundred times (the number of scanning lines) times longer than the period in which the switch is on. Therefore, the switch of the pixel circuit may be considered to be almost off.
From the above, it is assumed that the constant charge drive in this embodiment is a drive method in which the pixel circuit is in the hold state for most of the time when the liquid crystal panel is driven.

Next, the electrical characteristics of the liquid crystal material will be described. In the liquid crystal material, when the electric field applied from the outside changes, the dielectric properties also change at the same time as the optical properties change. That is, when each pixel of the liquid crystal panel is considered as a capacitive element (liquid crystal element) sandwiched between two electrodes, the capacitive element is a capacitive element whose electrostatic capacitance changes with the applied voltage. This phenomenon is called dynamic capacitance.

As described above, in the case of driving the capacitive element whose capacitance is changed by the applied voltage by the above-described constant charge driving, the following problems occur. That is, there is a problem that when the capacitance of the liquid crystal element is changed in the hold state in which the charge transfer is not performed, the applied voltage is also changed. This can be understood from the fact that the amount of charge is constant in the relationship of (amount of charge) = (capacitance) × (applied voltage).

For the above reasons, in the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, the voltage in the hold state is changed from the voltage in the writing state by the constant charge driving. As a result, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is different from the change in the driving method which does not take the hold state. FIG. 42 shows this state. FIG. 42A shows an example of control of the voltage written to the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and the absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 42B shows a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit in the case where time is taken on the horizontal axis and voltage is taken on the vertical axis. In FIG. 42C, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element.
It shows the time change of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage represented by FIG. 42 (A) or FIG. 42 (B) is written to the pixel circuit. In FIGS. 42A to 42C, a period F represents a voltage rewriting cycle, and times at which the voltage is rewritten are described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , and t ₄ .

Here, the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, and | V ₂ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , and t ₄ . I assume. (Refer to FIG. 42 (A))

The polarity of the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be switched periodically. (Reversal Driving: See FIG. 42 (B)) By this method, direct current voltage can be applied as little as possible to the liquid crystal, so that burn-in and the like due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the cycle of switching the polarity (inversion cycle) may be the same as the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, the occurrence of flicker due to the inversion drive can be reduced. Furthermore, the inversion period may be a period that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewriting period. In this case, power consumption can be reduced because the inversion period is long and the frequency can be reduced by changing the polarity to write the voltage.

FIG. 42C shows a time change of transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as shown in FIG. 42A or FIG. 42B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage to the liquid crystal element | V ₁
Is applied, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is taken as TR ₁ . Similarly, a voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is taken as TR ₂ . When the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V ₂ | at time t ₁ , the transmittance of the liquid crystal element does not immediately become TR ₂ as shown by the broken line 30401, Change slowly. For example, the rewriting period of the voltage, when the same as the frame period of the image signal of 60 Hz (16.7 msec), until the transmittance is changed to TR _2, it is necessary to time of several frames.

However, the smooth temporal change in transmittance as shown by the broken line 30401 is when the voltage | V ₂ | is accurately applied to the liquid crystal element. In an actual liquid crystal panel, for example, a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix, since the voltage in the hold state is changed from the voltage in the writing state by constant charge driving, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is a broken line 30401 It does not become a time change as shown in, but instead becomes a step time change as shown by a solid line 30402. This is because the voltage changes due to the constant charge drive, and thus the target voltage can not be reached in one writing. As a result, the response time of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is apparently longer than the original response time (broken line 30401), and the image display defects such as afterimage, tailing, and contrast deterioration are remarkable. It will cause it.

By using the overdrive driving, it is possible to solve simultaneously the phenomenon that the intrinsic response time of the liquid crystal element and the apparent response time due to the lack of writing by the dynamic capacitance and the constant charge drive are further increased. FIG. 43 shows this state. FIG. 43A shows an example of control of the voltage written to the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and the absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 43B shows a control example of the voltage to be written to the pixel circuit when time is taken on the horizontal axis and voltage is taken on the vertical axis. In FIG. 43C, the horizontal axis represents time, the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element, and the voltage represented by FIG. 43A or 43B is written to the pixel circuit. It represents the time change of the transmittance. In FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C), a period F represents a voltage rewriting cycle, and times at which the voltage is rewritten are described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , and t ₄ .

Here, the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, | V ₃ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , time t ₂ , t ₃ , t
_In the rewriting in ₄ , it is assumed that | V ₂ |. (Refer to FIG. 43 (A))

The polarity of the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be switched periodically. (Reversal Driving: See FIG. 43B) By this method, direct current voltage can be applied as little as possible to the liquid crystal, so that burn-in and the like due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the cycle of switching the polarity (inversion cycle) may be the same as the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, the occurrence of flicker due to the inversion drive can be reduced. Furthermore, the inversion period may be a period that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewriting period. In this case, power consumption can be reduced because the inversion period is long and the frequency can be reduced by changing the polarity to write the voltage.

FIG. 43C shows a time change of transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as shown in FIG. 43A or 43B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage to the liquid crystal element | V ₁
Is applied, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is taken as TR ₁ . Similarly, a voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is taken as TR ₂ . Similarly, the voltage | V ₃ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is set to TR ₃ . At time _{t 1,} the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is | _{V 1} | from | V
_When it changes to ₃ |, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element tries to change the transmittance to TR ₃ in several frames, as indicated by the broken line 30501. However, the voltage | _{V 3} | applied at the end at time _{t 2,} later than time _{t 2,} the voltage | _{V 2} | is applied. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not as shown by a broken line 30501 but as shown by a solid line 30502. here,
It is preferable to set the value of the voltage | V ₃ | so that the transmittance is approximately TR ₂ at time t ₂ . Here, the voltage | V ₃ | is also called an overdrive voltage.

That is, by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be controlled to some extent. This is because the response time of the liquid crystal changes with the strength of the electric field. Specifically, the stronger the electric field, the shorter the response time of the liquid crystal element, and the weaker the electric field, the longer the response time of the liquid crystal element.

Note that it is preferable to change the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | in accordance with the amount of voltage change, that is, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the target transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. . This is because even if the response time of the liquid crystal element is changed by the amount of change in voltage, the optimum response time can always be obtained if the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is changed accordingly. is there.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the mode of liquid crystal such as TN, VA, IPS, OCB. This is because even if the response speed of the liquid crystal varies depending on the mode of the liquid crystal, it is possible to always obtain an optimal response time by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | in accordance therewith.

The voltage rewrite cycle F may be the same as the frame cycle of the input signal. In this case, since the peripheral drive circuit of the liquid crystal display device can be simplified, a liquid crystal display device with low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

The voltage rewrite cycle F may be shorter than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewriting period F may be 1/2, 1/3 or less of the frame period of the input signal. It is effective to use this method together with the measures against the deterioration of the moving picture quality caused by the hold drive of the liquid crystal display, such as black insertion drive, backlight blinking, backlight scan, intermediate image insertion drive by motion compensation, etc. is there. That is, since the response time of the liquid crystal element which is required is short, it is relatively easy to use the overdrive driving method described in this embodiment because the response time of the required liquid crystal element is short. The response time of the liquid crystal element can be shortened. Although it is possible to shorten the response time of the liquid crystal element by the cell gap, the liquid crystal material, the liquid crystal mode, etc., it is technically difficult. Therefore, it is very important to use a method for shortening the response time of the liquid crystal element from the driving method such as overdrive.

The voltage rewriting period F may be longer than the frame period of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewriting period F may be twice, three times or more of the frame period of the input signal. It is effective to use this method in combination with means (circuit) for determining whether or not voltage rewriting is performed for a long time. That is, when the voltage rewriting is not performed for a long time, the operation of the circuit can be stopped during that period by not performing the voltage rewriting operation itself, so that a liquid crystal display device with low power consumption is obtained Can.

Next, a specific method for changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | in accordance with the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | which give the target transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ will be described.

The overdrive circuit is a circuit for appropriately controlling the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | in accordance with the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the target transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. The signal input to the drive circuit is a voltage | V giving a transmittance TR ₁
A signal relating to ₁ | and a signal relating to a voltage | V ₂ | giving the transmittance TR ₂ , and a signal outputted from the overdrive circuit becomes a signal relating to the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |. Here, as these signals, voltages applied to liquid crystal elements (| V ₁ |, | V ₂ |
, | V ₃ |), or a digital signal for applying a voltage to be applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the signal related to the overdrive circuit is described as a digital signal.

First, the overall configuration of the overdrive circuit will be described with reference to FIG. Here, as a signal for controlling the overdrive voltage, the input image signal 301
Use 01a and 30101b. As a result of processing these signals, it is assumed that an output image signal 30104 is output as a signal giving an overdrive voltage.

Here, the voltages │V ₁ │ and │V ₂ │ giving desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ are
The input image signals 30101 a and 30101 b are also preferably image signals in adjacent frames, since they are image signals in adjacent frames. In order to obtain such a signal, the input image signal 30101a is input to the delay circuit 30102 in FIG. 44A, and the signal output as a result thereof is input image signal 3010.
It can be 1b. The delay circuit 30102 may be, for example, a memory. That is, in order to delay the input image signal 30101 a by one frame, the input image signal 30101 a is stored in the memory, and at the same time, the signal stored in the previous frame is stored as the input image signal 30101 b. By simultaneously taking out the input image signal 30101 a and the input image signal 30101 b to the correction circuit 30103, it is possible to handle image signals in adjacent frames. Then, an image signal in frames adjacent to each other is input to the correction circuit 30103, whereby an output image signal 30104 can be obtained. When a memory is used as the delay circuit 30102, a memory having a capacity capable of storing an image signal of one frame (that is, a frame memory) can be used to delay one frame. By doing this, it is possible to have a function as a delay circuit without excess or deficiency of memory capacity.

Next, the delay circuit 30102 configured mainly for reducing the memory capacity will be described. By using such a circuit as the delay circuit 30102, the memory capacity can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Specifically, a delay circuit as shown in FIG. 44B can be used as the delay circuit 30102 having such a feature. The delay circuit 30102 illustrated in (B) of FIG. 44 includes an encoder 30105, a memory 30106, and a decoder 30107.

The operation of the delay circuit 30102 shown in FIG. 44B is as follows. First, before storing the input image signal 30101a in the memory 30106, the encoder 3010
5 performs compression processing. This can reduce the size of data to be stored in the memory 30106. As a result, since the memory capacity can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Then, the image signal subjected to the compression processing is sent to the decoder 30107 where the expansion processing is performed. By this, the encoder 30105
Can restore the previous signal that has been compressed. Where the encoder 3010
The compression and decompression process performed by the V.5 and decoder 30107 may be a reversible process. By doing this, since the image signal does not deteriorate even after the compression and expansion processing is performed, the memory capacity can be reduced without degrading the quality of the image finally displayed on the device. Furthermore, the compression and decompression processing performed by the encoder 30105 and the decoder 30107 may be irreversible processing. By so doing, the size of the data of the image signal after compression can be made very small, so the memory capacity can be greatly reduced.

Note that various methods other than those described above can be used as a method for reducing the memory capacity. Instead of compressing the image by the encoder, reduce the color information of the image signal (for example, reduce color from 260,000 colors to 65,000 colors), or reduce the number of data (decrease the resolution), etc. Methods can be used.

Next, specific examples of the correction circuit 30103 will be described with reference to (C) to (E) of FIG. The correction circuit 30103 is a circuit for outputting an output image signal of a certain value from two input image signals. Here, when the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is non-linear and it is difficult to obtain by a simple calculation, a lookup table (LUT) may be used as the correction circuit 30103. In the LUT, the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is obtained in advance by measurement, so that output image signals corresponding to the two input image signals can be obtained by simply referring to the LUT. By using the LUT 30108 as the correction circuit 30103, the correction circuit 30103 can be realized without complicated circuit design or the like.

Here, since the LUT is one of memories, it is preferable to reduce the memory capacity as much as possible in order to reduce the manufacturing cost. A circuit shown in FIG. 44D can be considered as an example of the correction circuit 30103 for realizing it. The correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG.
Has a LUT 30109 and an adder 30110. The LUT 30109 stores difference data of the input image signal 30101 a and the output image signal 30104 to be output. That is, corresponding difference data is extracted from the LUT 30109 from the input image signal 30101 a and the input image signal 30101 b, and the extracted difference data and the input image signal 30 are extracted.
An output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding 101 a by the adder 30110. Note that, by using data stored in the LUT 30109 as difference data, L
The memory capacity of UT can be reduced. Because the output image signal 30104 as it is
This is because, since the differential data has a smaller data size than the differential data, the memory capacity required for the LUT 30109 can be reduced.

Furthermore, if the output image signal can be obtained by a simple operation such as arithmetic operation of two input image signals, it can be realized by a combination of simple circuits such as an adder, a subtractor, and a multiplier.
As a result, it is not necessary to use a LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.
As such a circuit, the circuit shown in (E) of FIG. 44 can be mentioned. Figure 44 (
The correction circuit 30103 shown in E) includes a subtractor 30111, a multiplier 30112, and an adder 3
And 0113. First, the difference between the input image signal 30101 a and the input image signal 30101 b is obtained by the subtractor 30111. Thereafter, a multiplier 30112 multiplies the difference value by an appropriate coefficient. Then, the adder 30113 can add the difference value obtained by multiplying the input image signal 30101 a by an appropriate coefficient to obtain the output image signal 30104. By using such a circuit, it is not necessary to use a LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.

Note that using a correction circuit 30103 shown in (E) of FIG. 44 under certain conditions can prevent the output of an inappropriate output image signal 30104. The conditions include an output image signal 30104 for providing an overdrive voltage and an input image signal 30101.
The difference between a and the input image signal 30101 b has linearity. Then, the slope of this linearity is taken as a coefficient to be multiplied by the multiplier 30112. That is, it is preferable to use the correction circuit 30103 shown in (E) of FIG. 44 for a liquid crystal element having such a property. As a liquid crystal element having such a property, an IPS mode liquid crystal element having a small dependency of response speed on gradation can be mentioned. Thus, for example, by using the correction circuit 30103 shown in (E) of FIG.
In addition, an overdrive circuit can be obtained which can prevent the output of an inappropriate output image signal 30104.

The functions equivalent to those of the circuits shown in (A) to (E) of FIG. 44 may be realized by software processing. The memory used for the delay circuit may be another memory included in the liquid crystal display device, a memory included in an apparatus on the side of sending out an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display (for example, a video card etc. included in a personal computer or a similar device). It can be diverted. By this, not only the manufacturing cost can be reduced, but also the user can select the strength of overdrive, the condition to use, etc. according to the preference.

Next, driving for operating the potential of the common line will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 45 (
A) shows a plurality of pixel circuits when one common line is disposed for one scanning line in a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element FIG. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 45A includes a transistor 30201, an auxiliary capacitor 30202, a display element 30203, a video signal line 30204, a scan line 30205, and a common line 30206.

The gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is Are electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 30202 and one electrode of the display element 30203.
The other electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206.

First, since the transistor 30201 is turned on in the pixel selected by the scanning line 30205, the display element 30203 and the storage capacitor 3 are each connected through the video signal line 30204.
A voltage corresponding to the video signal is applied to 0202. At this time, the video signal is the common line 30.
If the lowest gray level is to be displayed for all pixels connected to 206, or if the highest gray level is to be displayed for all pixels connected to the common line 30206, the pixel It is not necessary to write a video signal through the video signal line 30204 respectively.
By changing the potential of the common line 30206 instead of writing the video signal through the video signal line 30204, the voltage applied to the display element 30203 can be changed.

Next, FIG. 45B shows a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element, in which two common lines are provided for one scanning line, It is a figure showing a plurality of pixel circuits. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 45B includes a transistor 30211, an auxiliary capacitor 30212, a display element 30213, a video signal line 30214, a scan line 30215, a first common line 30216, and a second common line 30217. .

The gate electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the scan line 30215, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30214, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is Are electrically connected to one electrode of the storage capacitor 30212 and one electrode of the display element 30213.
Further, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 30212 is electrically connected to the first common line 30216.
Further, in the pixel adjacent to the pixel, the other electrode of the storage capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the second common line 30217.

Since the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 45B includes only a small number of pixels electrically connected to one common line, the first common line 30216 can be used instead of writing the video signal through the video signal line 30214. Alternatively, by moving the potential of the second common line 30217, the frequency at which the voltage applied to the display element 30213 can be changed is significantly increased. In addition, source inversion drive or dot inversion drive is possible. The source inversion drive or the dot inversion drive can suppress the flicker while improving the reliability of the element.

Next, the scanning backlight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A shows a scanning backlight in which cold cathode tubes are juxtaposed. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 46A includes a diffusion plate 30301 and N cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 30302-N. By arranging N cold cathode fluorescent tubes 30302-1 to 30302-N in parallel behind diffusion plate 30301, N cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 30302 -N scan with their brightness changed. Can.

The change in luminance of each cold cathode tube at the time of scanning will be described with reference to FIG. First, the luminance of the cold cathode tube 30302-1 is changed for a fixed time. And then, cold cathode tube 30
The brightness of the cold cathode fluorescent tube 30302-2 arranged next to 302-1 is changed by the same time. Thus, the luminance is sequentially changed from the cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302-N. In addition, in (C) of FIG. 46, although the luminance to be changed for a fixed time is set to be smaller than the original luminance, it may be larger than the original luminance. Also, a cold cathode tube 30302-1 to 3030
Although the scanning is performed up to 2-N, the cold cathode tubes 30302 -N to 30302-1 may be scanned in the reverse direction.

By driving as shown in FIG. 46, the average luminance of the backlight can be reduced. Therefore, the power consumption of the backlight which occupies most of the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced.

Note that an LED may be used as a light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in FIG. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 46B includes a diffusion plate 30311 and light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N in which LEDs are juxtaposed. When an LED is used as a light source for a scanning backlight, the backlight is thin,
There is an advantage that it can be lightened. In addition, there is an advantage that the color reproduction range can be expanded. Furthermore, LEs juxtaposed to each of light sources 30312-1 to 30312-N juxtaposed with LEDs
Since D can be similarly scanned, it can also be a point scanning type backlight.
If the point scanning type is used, the image quality of the moving image can be further improved.

In addition, also when LED is used as a light source of a backlight, as shown to (C) of FIG. 46, it can drive by changing a brightness | luminance.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Or, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be constructed by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of this embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can do it freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
Tenth Embodiment

In the present embodiment, the operation of the display device is described.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a display device.

The display device 180100 includes a pixel portion 180101, a signal line driver circuit 180103, and a scan line driver circuit 180104. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm are arranged to extend in the column direction from the signal line driver circuit 180103. Pixel portion 180101
A plurality of scan lines G1 to Gn are arranged extending in the row direction from the scan line drive circuit 180104. The pixels 180102 are arranged in a matrix at the intersections of the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm and the plurality of scan lines G1 to Gn.

Note that the signal line driver circuit 180103 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be called a video signal. Note that the scanning line driver circuit 180104
Has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be called a scanning signal.

Note that the pixel 180102 includes at least a switching element connected to a signal line. The switching element is controlled to be on or off by the potential of the scanning line (scanning signal). Then, when the switching element is on, the pixel 180102 is selected, and when the switching element is off, the pixel 180102 is not selected.

When the pixel 180102 is selected (selected state), a video signal is input to the pixel 180102 from the signal line. Then, the state of the pixel 180102 (for example, the luminance, the transmittance, the voltage of the storage capacitor, and the like) changes in accordance with the input video signal.

When the pixel 180102 is not selected (non-selected state), the video signal is the pixel 1801.
Not input to 02. However, since the pixel 180102 holds a potential corresponding to a video signal input at the time of selection, the pixel 180102 maintains (for example, luminance, transmittance, voltage of a storage capacitor, or the like) corresponding to the video signal.

Note that the structure of the display device is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, a wiring (such as a scan line, a signal line, a power supply line, a capacitor line, or a common line) may be newly added depending on the configuration of the pixel 180102. As another example, circuits having various functions may be added.

FIG. 82 shows an example of a timing chart for explaining the operation of the display device.

The timing chart of FIG. 82 shows one frame period corresponding to a period in which an image for one screen is displayed. The period for one frame is not particularly limited, but the person who sees the image flickers (flicker)
It is preferable to set it to at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel the

In the timing chart of FIG. 82, the scanning line G1 in the first row, the scanning line Gi in the i-th row (scanning line G1
This shows the timing when any one of Gm to Gm, the (i + 1) -th scan line Gi + 1 and the m-th scan line Gm are selected.

Note that at the same time a scan line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scan line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scan line Gi is also selected.

The scanning lines G1 to Gm are selected in order from the scanning line G1 in the first row to the scanning line Gm in the mth row (hereinafter, also referred to as scanning). For example, during a period in which the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected, scan lines (G1 to Gi-1, Gi + 1 to Gm other than the scan line Gi in the i-th row) are selected.
) Is not selected. Then, in the next period, the scan line Gi + 1 in the (i + 1) th row is selected. Note that a period in which one scan line is selected is referred to as one gate selection period.

Thus, when a scan line in a row is selected, the plurality of pixels 180 connected to the scan line is selected.
A video signal is input to the signal line 102 from each of the signal lines G1 to Gm. For example, i
While the scanning line Gi of the line is selected, the plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scanning line Gi of the i-th line respectively input arbitrary video signals from the respective signal lines S1 to Sn.
Thus, the plurality of individual pixels 180102 can be independently controlled by the scan signal and the video signal.

Next, the case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of sub gate selection periods will be described.
FIG. 83 shows a timing chart in the case where one gate selection period is divided into two sub gate selection periods (a first sub gate selection period and a second sub gate selection period).

Note that one gate selection period can be divided into three or more subgate selection periods.

The timing chart of FIG. 83 shows one frame period corresponding to a period in which an image for one screen is displayed. The period for one frame is not particularly limited, but the person who sees the image flickers (flicker)
It is preferable to set it to at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel the

Note that one frame consists of two subframes (first and second subframes)
It is divided into

The timing chart of FIG. 83 is the scan line Gi of the i-th row, the scan line Gi + 1, j of the i + 1-th row.
The timing at which the scanning line Gj (any one of the scanning lines Gi + 1 to Gm) in the row, the scanning line in the j + 1th row and the scanning line Gj + 1 in the Gj + 1th row are selected is shown.

Note that at the same time a scan line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scan line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scan line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scan line Gi is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially scanned within each subgate selection period. For example, in a certain one gate selection period, the scan line Gi in the i-th row is selected in the first subgate selection period, and the scan line Gj in the j-th row is selected in the second subgate selection period.
Then, in one gate selection period, it becomes possible to operate as if scanning signals for two rows were simultaneously selected. At this time, separate video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first subgate selection period and the second subgate selection period. Therefore,
A plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the i-th row and a plurality of pixels 1 connected to the j-th row
A separate video signal can be input to the 80102.

Next, a driving method for converting a frame rate (also referred to as an input frame rate) of input image data and a frame rate (also referred to as a display frame rate) of display will be described. The frame rate is the number of frames per second, and the unit is Hz.

In the present embodiment, the input frame rate may not necessarily coincide with the display frame rate. When the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, the frame rate can be converted by a circuit (frame rate conversion circuit) that converts the frame rate of the image data. By doing this, even when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, display can be performed at various display frame rates.

When the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate, it is possible to convert to various display frame rates and perform display by discarding part of the input image data.
In this case, since the display frame rate can be reduced, the operating frequency of the drive circuit for displaying can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, all or part of the input image data is displayed a plurality of times, another image is generated from the input image data, and the input image data is It is possible to convert to various display frame rates and perform display by using means such as generating an unrelated image. In this case, the quality of the moving image can be improved by increasing the display frame rate.

In the present embodiment, a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate will be described in detail. The frame rate conversion method in the case where the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate can be realized by performing the reverse procedure of the frame rate conversion method in the case where the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate. it can.

In the present embodiment, an image displayed at the same frame rate as the input frame rate is referred to as a basic image. On the other hand, an image displayed at a frame rate different from that of the basic image and displayed to match the input frame rate with the display frame rate will be referred to as an interpolated image. As the basic image, the same image as the input image data can be used. The same image as the basic image can be used as the interpolation image. Furthermore, an image different from the basic image may be created, and the created image may be used as an interpolation image.

When creating an interpolation image, a method of detecting temporal change (movement of an image) of input image data and using an image in an intermediate state of these as an interpolation image, an image obtained by multiplying the luminance of a basic image by a coefficient A method of making the interpolation image, creating a plurality of different images from the input image data and presenting the plurality of images sequentially in time (one of the plurality of images is used as a basic image,
There is a method of causing the observer to perceive as if the image corresponding to the input image data is displayed by making the remaining the interpolation image). As a method of creating a plurality of different images from the input image data, there are a method of converting gamma values of the input image data, a method of dividing tone values included in the input image data, and the like.

The image in the intermediate state (intermediate image) is an image obtained by detecting a temporal change (movement of the image) of the input image data and interpolating the detected movement. Determining an intermediate image by such a method is referred to as motion compensation.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method will be described. According to this method, it is possible to realize frame rate conversion of arbitrary rational number (n / m) times. Here, n and m are integers of 1 or more. The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment can be divided into the first step and the second step and handled. Here, the first step is a step of frame rate conversion to an arbitrary rational number (n / m). Here, a basic image may be used as the interpolation image, or an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation may be used as the interpolation image. In the second step, a plurality of different images (sub-images) are created from the input image data or each frame rate converted image in the first step, and the plurality of sub-images are temporally continuous. Step for performing the display method. By using the method according to the second step, although it is actually displaying a plurality of different images, it can also be perceived visually by the human eye as if the original image was displayed.

In the frame rate conversion method according to the present embodiment, both the first step and the second step may be used, or the first step may be omitted and only the second step may be used. Step 2 may be omitted and only the first step may be used.

First, as the first step, frame rate conversion of arbitrary rational number (n / m) times will be described. (Refer to FIG. 84) In FIG. 84, the horizontal axis is time, and the vertical axis is shown by dividing the cases into various n and m. The graphic in FIG. 84 represents a schematic view of the displayed image, and represents the timing of display by the horizontal position. Furthermore, it is assumed that the movement of the image is schematically represented by the points displayed in the figure. However, this is an example for explanation and the displayed image is not limited to this. This method can be applied to various images.

The period Tin represents the period of input image data. The period of the input image data corresponds to the input frame rate. For example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the period of input image data is 1/60 seconds. Similarly, if the input frame rate is 50 Hz, then
The cycle of input image data is 1/50 seconds. Thus, the period of the input image data (unit:
Seconds) is the reciprocal of the input frame rate (unit: Hz). Note that various input frame rates can be used. For example, 24 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
48 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 140 Hz, etc. can be mentioned. Where 2
4 Hz is a frame rate used for film movies and the like. 50 Hz is a frame rate used for video signals and the like of the PAL standard. The 60 Hz is a frame rate used for a video signal or the like of the NTSC standard. 70 Hz is a frame rate used for a display input signal or the like of a personal computer. 48Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
140 Hz is a frame rate twice as high as these. The frame rate is not limited to twice, and may be a frame rate of various multiples. As described above, according to the method described in the present embodiment, frame rate conversion can be realized for input signals of various standards.

The procedure of frame rate conversion of arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step is as follows.
As the procedure 1, the k-th interpolation image for the first basic image (k is an integer of 1 or more; the initial value is 1
Determine the display timing of). It is assumed that the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of input image data by k (m / n) has passed since the display of the first basic image.
In step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is an integer. If it is an integer, the (k (m / n) +1) -th basic image is displayed at the display timing of the k-th interpolation image, and the first step is ended. If it is not an integer, proceed to step 3.
In step 3, an image to be used as the k-th interpolation image is determined. Specifically, the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is converted into the form of x + y / n. Here, x and y are integers, and y is a number smaller than n. Then, when the k-th interpolation image is an intermediate image determined by motion compensation, the k-th interpolation image is
An intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the basic image of (1) to the (x + 2) basic image by (y / n). When the k-th interpolation image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) -th basic image can be used. The method of obtaining the intermediate image as an image corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement of the image by (y / n) will be described in detail in another part.
In step 4, the interpolation image of interest is moved to the next interpolation image. Specifically, the value of k is increased by 1, and the process returns to step 1.

Next, in the procedure in the first step, the values of n and m are specifically shown and described in detail.

The mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step may be implemented in the device or may be determined in advance at the design stage of the device. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is implemented in the device, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. Note that the conditions mentioned here are the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Includes altitude, acceleration, travel speed, etc., user settings, software versions, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is determined in advance at the design stage of the apparatus, the drive circuit optimum for each drive method can be used, and the mechanism is determined. Thus, it is possible to expect a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects.

In the case of n = 1, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1 (where n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. As for the display timing of the first interpolation image, the period of the input image data is k (m (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
It is the time when the period of / n) times or 1 time has passed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the first interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1) th, ie, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 1, the kth image is a basic image, the (k + 1) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is one time of the cycle of the input image data. Do.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 1 (n / m = 1),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
A method of driving a display device, which sequentially displays the (k + 1) th image at intervals equal to the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 1, since the frame rate conversion circuit can be omitted, there is an advantage that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, it has the advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 1. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 1.

In the case of n = 2, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 2 (where n = 2, m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. As for the display timing of the first interpolation image, the period of the input image data is k (m (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
At this point, a period obtained by multiplying / n) times, that is, 1⁄2 times, has elapsed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/2, it is not an integer. Therefore, the procedure goes to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as a first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 1/2 is x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1⁄2, x = 0 and y = 1. Then, when the first interpolation image is an intermediate image determined by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is
1) That is, an intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th, ie, the second basic image by y / n times or 1/2 times. First
When making the interpolation image of the same image as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image, ie, the first basic image can be used.

According to the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the interpolation image of interest is transferred from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, change k from 1 to 2 and return to step 1.

When k = 2, procedure 1 determines the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image. The display timing of the second interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the period of the input image data by k (m / n), that is, by one, has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the second interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1) th, ie, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is half of the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
A method of driving a display device, which sequentially displays the (k + 2) th image at an interval of 1/2 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by halving the motion from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
A method of driving a display device, which sequentially displays the (k + 2) th image at an interval of 1/2 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2, it is also called double speed driving or simply double speed driving.
For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is
120 Hz drive). And an image will be displayed twice continuously with respect to one input image. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
In particular, the image quality improvement effect is remarkable. This relates to the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to so-called dynamic capacitance, in which the capacitance of the liquid crystal element fluctuates due to the applied voltage. That is, by making the display frame rate larger than the input frame rate, the frequency of the image data writing operation can be increased, so that the failure such as the tailing of the moving image and the afterimage caused by the shortage of the writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance is reduced. be able to. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction of it (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes.

In the case of n = 3, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3 (where n = 3, m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. As for the display timing of the first interpolation image, the period of the input image data is k (m (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
At this point, a period obtained by multiplying / n) times or 1/3 times has elapsed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the procedure goes to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as a first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 1/3 is x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/3, x = 0 and y = 1. Then, when the first interpolation image is an intermediate image determined by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is
1) That is, an intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th, ie, the second basic image by y / n times or 1/3 times. First
When making the interpolation image of the same image as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image, ie, the first basic image can be used.

According to the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the interpolation image of interest is transferred from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, change k from 1 to 2 and return to step 1.

When k = 2, procedure 1 determines the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image. The display timing of the second interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of the input image data by k (m / n), that is, 2/3, has passed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the procedure goes to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as a second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 2/3 x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. Then, when the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is
1) That is, an intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th, ie, the second basic image by y / n times or 2/3 times. Second
When making the interpolation image of the same image as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image, ie, the first basic image can be used.

According to the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the interpolation image of interest is transferred from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, change k from 2 to 3 and return to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the period of the input image data by k (m / n), that is, by one, has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the third interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1) th, ie, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 3) at intervals of 1/3 times of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 1/3.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image to the i + 1-th image by 2/3.
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 3) at intervals of 1/3 times of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 3. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 3, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is greater than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3, it is also called triple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, an image is displayed three times consecutively for one input image. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, AC drive of the liquid crystal display and 180 Hz
It is also effective to combine the drive. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 180H.
while the frequency of the AC drive is an integral multiple or an integer fraction (eg, 45 Hz, 9
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 180 Hz, 360 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to an extent that human eyes do not perceive it.

n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3/2 (where n = 3, m = 2 in FIG. 84)
In this case, the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, step 1
Then, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolation image is set to k cycles of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
It is the time when the (m / n) times, that is, the 2/3 times, has elapsed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the procedure goes to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as a first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 2/3 x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. Then, when the first interpolation image is an intermediate image determined by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is
1) That is, an intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th, ie, the second basic image by y / n times or 2/3 times. First
When making the interpolation image of the same image as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image, ie, the first basic image can be used.

According to the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the interpolation image of interest is transferred from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, change k from 1 to 2 and return to step 1.

When k = 2, procedure 1 determines the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image. The display timing of the second interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the period of the input image data by k (m / n), that is, 4/3, has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 4/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the procedure goes to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as a second interpolation image is determined. For that, x coefficient 4/3
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 4/3, x = 1 and y = 1. Then, when the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is
1) That is, an intermediate image is obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the second basic image to the (x + 2) th, ie, the third basic image by y / n times or 1/3 times. Second
When making the interpolation image of the same image as the basic image, the (x + 1) th or second basic image can be used.

According to the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the interpolation image of interest is transferred from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, change k from 2 to 3 and return to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolation image is a point at which a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of the input image data by k (m / n), that is, twice, has passed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether the coefficient k (m / n) used to determine the display timing of the third interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1) th, ie, the third basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is a basic image, and the image display period is 2/3 times the period of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
The (i + 2) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 3) at an interval of 2/3 times a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 2/3.
The (k + 2) -th image has a 1/3 movement from the (i + 1) -th image to the (i + 2) -th image.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 2) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
The (i + 2) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 3) at an interval of 2/3 times a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 2) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, there is an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2. Furthermore, if the conversion ratio is 3/2, the conversion ratio is 3 /
It has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than the case of larger than two.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, it is also called 3 / 2-speed drive or 1.5-speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 90
It is Hz (90 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed three times consecutively for two input images. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to the drive method with a large drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3 × speed drive), the motion frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation. , Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided.
The image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC drive and 90 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 90 Hz, the frequency of the AC drive is an integral multiple or an integer fraction (for example, 3
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 45 Hz, 90 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to such an extent that human eyes do not perceive it.

Although details of the procedure are omitted for positive integers n and m other than the above, the conversion ratio may be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) according to the procedure of frame rate conversion in the first step. it can. Among the combinations of positive integers n and m, the conversion ratio (n /
For combinations where m) can be reduced, conversion ratios after reduction can be handled in the same manner.

For example, in the case of n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4 (n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 84),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 4) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is characterized by being 1⁄4 of the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 4) at an interval of 1⁄4 of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 1/4.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by halving the motion from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data.
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 3/4.
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 4) at an interval of 1⁄4 of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 4. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 4, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is greater than 4.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4, it is also called quadruple speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). And an image will be displayed continuously 4 times with respect to one input image. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
As compared with a drive method with a small drive frequency such as Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3 × speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The motion can be smoothed and the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or an integer fraction (for example, 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes.

Furthermore, for example, n = 4 and m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4/3 (n in FIG. 84).
In the case of 4, m = 3),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 4) th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is characterized by being 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
And the (i + 2) th image data,
The (i + 3) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 4) at an interval of 3⁄4 of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 3/4.
The (k + 2) -th image is half the motion from the (i + 1) -th image to the (i + 2) -th image.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The (k + 3) th image has a 1/4 movement from the (i + 2) th image to the (i + 3) th image.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the (i + 3) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
And the (i + 2) th image data,
The (i + 3) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
A driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying an image of (k + 4) at an interval of 3⁄4 of a cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 2) th image data,
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the (i + 3) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it has an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3. Furthermore, if the conversion ratio is 4/3, the conversion ratio is 4 /
It has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced compared with the case of greater than three.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it is also called 4/3 double speed drive or 1.25 double speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 8
It is 0 Hz (80 Hz drive). Then, images are displayed four times consecutively for three input images. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to the drive method with a large drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3 × speed drive), the motion frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation. , Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 80 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 80 Hz, the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or an integer fraction of that (for example,
By setting the frequency to 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to such an extent that human eyes do not perceive it.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5 (n = 5 in FIG. 84,
In the case of m = 1),
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 4) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 5) th image is a basic image, and the image display period is 1⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
With the k + 4 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying the (k + 5) th image at an interval of 1⁄5 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 1/5.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 2/5.
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 3/5.
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 4/5.
The (k + 5) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
With the k + 4 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying the (k + 5) th image at an interval of 1⁄5 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 5) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 5, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5 × speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
As compared with a drive method with a small drive frequency such as Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3 × speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The motion can be smoothed and the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 300 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integer fraction (for example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5/2 (n in FIG. 84).
In the case of 5, m = 2))
The kth image is a basic image,
The (k + 1) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 2) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 3) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 4) th image is an interpolated image,
The (k + 5) th image is a basic image, and the image display period is 1⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
The (i + 2) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
With the k + 4 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying the (k + 5) th image at an interval of 1⁄5 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the ith image data to the (i + 1) th image data by 2/5.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data by 4/5.
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the (i + 1) th image data to the (i + 2) th image data by 1/5.
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the (i + 1) th image data to the (i + 2) th image data by 3/5.
The (k + 5) th image is displayed according to the (i + 2) th image data.

As still another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
And the (i + 1) th image data,
The (i + 2) th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a fixed cycle,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
And the k + 2 image,
With the k + 3 image,
With the k + 4 image,
It is a driving method of a display device for sequentially displaying the (k + 5) th image at an interval of 1⁄5 times the period of the input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 2) th image is displayed according to the ith image data,
The (k + 3) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The (k + 4) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The (k + 5) th image is displayed according to the (i + 2) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, it has an advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also referred to as 5 / 2-speed drive or 2.5-speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 150 H
z (150 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed five times consecutively for two input images. At this time, when the interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, as compared with a drive method with a small drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double-speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image, so the motion of moving pictures is smoothed further. It is possible to significantly improve the quality of moving pictures. Furthermore, as compared with a driving method with a large driving frequency such as 180 Hz driving (3 × speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so inexpensive circuits can be used, manufacturing cost and power consumption It can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 150 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is
While the frequency of the AC drive is an integral multiple or an integer fraction (eg, 30 Hz, 50
By setting the frequency to Hz, 75 Hz, 150 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to an extent that it is not perceived by human eyes.

Thus, by setting the positive integers n and m variously, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m). Although detailed description is omitted, in the range where n is 10 or less,
n = 1, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 1 (1 × driving, 60 Hz),
n = 2, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 2 (double speed driving, 120 Hz),
n = 3, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3 (3 × speed drive, 180 Hz),
n = 3, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3/2 (3 / 2-speed drive, 90 Hz),
n = 4, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4 (quadruple speed drive, 240 Hz),
n = 4, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4/3 (4/3 speed drive, 80 Hz),
n = 5, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/1 (5-fold speed drive, 300 Hz),
n = 5, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/2 (5 / 2-speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (5 / 3-speed drive, 100 Hz),
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5 / 4-speed drive, 75 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (6-fold speed drive, 360 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (6/5 speed drive, 72 Hz),
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (7 × driving, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7 / 2-speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (7/3 speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/4 speed drive, 105 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (7/5 double speed drive, 84 Hz),
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/6 speed drive, 70 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (8 × driving, 480 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (8 / 3-speed drive, 160 Hz),
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (8/5 speed drive, 96 Hz),
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (8/7 double speed drive, 68.6 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (9 × driving, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9 / 2-speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/4 speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (9 / 5-speed drive, 108 Hz),
n = 9, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (9/7 double speed drive, 77.1 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/8 double speed drive, 67.5 Hz)
,
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (10 × speed drive, 600 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (10/3 speed drive, 200 H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (10/7 double speed drive, 85.7)
Hz),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (10/9 double speed drive, 66.7)
Hz),
Combinations of the above are conceivable. Note that the notation of frequency is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, and for other input frame rates, a value obtained by integrating each conversion ratio with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, although the specific n and m numbers are not listed, the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step can be applied to various n and m. Is clear.

Note that the conversion ratio can be determined depending on how much of the displayed image is an image that can be displayed without performing motion compensation in the input image data. Specifically, as m is smaller, the proportion of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is larger. If the frequency of motion compensation is low, the frequency of operation of the circuit that performs motion compensation can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, an image including an error due to motion compensation (the motion of the image is accurately reflected) Image quality can be improved because the possibility of creating an intermediate image) can be reduced. Such conversion ratio is, for example, 1, 2, 3, 3/2, 4, in the range where n is 10 or less.
5,5 / 2,6,7,7 / 2,8,9,9 / 2,10 are mentioned. By using such a conversion ratio, it is possible to increase the quality of the image and reduce the power consumption, particularly when using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the interpolation image. This is because, when m is 2, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is relatively large (only 1/2 of the total number of input image data exists) ,
This is because the frequency of motion compensation is reduced. Furthermore, when m is 1, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on input image data is large (equal to the total number of input image data), and motion compensation is not performed. is there. On the other hand, as m is larger, it is possible to use an intermediate image created by highly accurate motion compensation, and thus has an advantage that the motion of the image can be smoother.

Note that when the display device is a liquid crystal display device, the conversion ratio can be determined in accordance with the response time of the liquid crystal element. Here, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the time from the change of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element to the response of the liquid crystal element. In the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element differs depending on the amount of change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element, an average value of the response times of a plurality of representative voltage changes can be used. Alternatively, the response time of the liquid crystal element is MPRT (Movin
g Picture Response Time) may be defined.
Then, by frame rate conversion, the conversion ratio can be determined such that the image display cycle becomes close to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Specifically, it is preferable that the response time of the liquid crystal element is a time from a value obtained by integrating the period of the input image data and the reciprocal of the conversion ratio to a half value of this value. By doing this, the image display cycle can be made to match the response time of the liquid crystal element, so that the image quality can be improved. For example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 4 milliseconds or more and 8 milliseconds or less, double speed driving (120 Hz driving) can be performed. This is because the image display cycle of the 120 Hz drive is about 8 milliseconds and half of the image display cycle of the 120 Hz drive is about 4 milliseconds. Similarly, for example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 3 milliseconds or more and 6 milliseconds or less, triple speed driving (180 Hz driving) can be performed, and the response time of the liquid crystal element is 5
In the case of milliseconds or more and 11 milliseconds or less, 1.5 × speed driving (90 Hz driving) can be performed, and in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 2 milliseconds or more and 4 milliseconds or less, quadruple speed driving (240 Hz driving) And when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 6 ms or more and 12 ms or less, 1).
. It can be 25 × speed drive (80 Hz drive). The same applies to the other drive frequencies.

The conversion ratio can also be determined by the trade-off between the quality of the moving image and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost. That is, while the quality of moving pictures can be improved by increasing the conversion ratio, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced by decreasing the conversion ratio. That is, each conversion ratio in the range where n is 10 or less has the following advantages.

When the conversion ratio is 1, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 1, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 1. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1 time of the cycle of input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 2, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 2, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately half of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 3. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1⁄3 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3/2, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 3/2. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 2/3 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 4, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 4. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄4 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4/3, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 4/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3⁄4 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 5. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/2, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 5/2. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 2⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/3, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 5/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/4, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/4, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 5/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 4/5 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 6, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 6. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄6 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6/5, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 6/5, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 5/6 times the cycle of input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 7. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1/7 of the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/2, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/2, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 7/2. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 2/7 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/3, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 7/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3/7 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/4, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/4, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 7/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 4/7 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/5, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/5, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 7/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 5/7 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/6, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/6, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 7/6. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 6/7 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 8, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 8. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄8 of the cycle of input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/3, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 8/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3⁄8 of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/5, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/5, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 5/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/7, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/7, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 8/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 7/8 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 9. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/2, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/2, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 9/2. Furthermore, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained, and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 2/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/4, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/4, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 9/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 4/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/5, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/5, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 9/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 5/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/7, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/7, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 9/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 7/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/8, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 9/8. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 8/9 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10, the quality of the moving image can be improved compared to when the conversion ratio is less than 10,
Power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is greater than 10. Furthermore, m
Is small, power consumption can be reduced while high image quality can be obtained. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1/10 of the cycle of the input image data,
Image quality can be improved.

When the conversion ratio is 10/3, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 10/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3/10 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/7, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/7, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 10/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 7/10 times the cycle of input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/9, the moving picture quality can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/9, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the conversion ratio larger than 10/9. Furthermore, since m is large, the motion of the image can be smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 9/10 times the cycle of input image data.

It should be noted that it is apparent that each conversion ratio in the range where n is greater than 10 has similar advantages.

Next, as a second step, an image according to the input image data or each image frame rate converted to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) in the first step (referred to as an original image) A method of creating a plurality of different images (sub-images) and presenting the plurality of sub-images sequentially in time will be described. By doing this, although the user is actually presenting a plurality of images, it can also be perceived visually by the human eye as if one original image was displayed.

Here, among the sub-images created from one original image, the sub-image to be displayed first is referred to as a first sub-image. Here, it is assumed that the timing to display the first sub-image is the same as the timing to display the original image determined in the first step. on the other hand,
The sub-image displayed thereafter is referred to as a second sub-image. The timing for displaying the second sub-image can be determined arbitrarily regardless of the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. The image to be actually displayed is an image created from the original image by the method in the second step. Note that various images can be used as the original image for creating the sub image. Note that the number of sub-images is not limited to two, and may be larger than two. In the second step, the number of sub-images is denoted as J (J is an integer of 2 or more). At this time, a sub-image displayed at the same timing as the display timing of the original image determined in the first step is referred to as a first sub-image, and a sub-image subsequently displayed is displayed. Second sub-image, third sub-image through
We call it a sub-image of.

Although there are various methods for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image, the following methods can be mentioned as main ones. One is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image. One is a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. One is a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image.

Here, the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images can be further divided into a plurality of methods. The following can be mentioned as main ones. One is a method of making at least one sub-image a black image (referred to as a black insertion method). One is
When the brightness of the original image is divided into a plurality of ranges and the brightness in the range is controlled, a method of using only one sub image of all the sub images (referred to as a time division gradation control method) ). First, one sub-image is a bright image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed, and the other sub-image is a dark image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed ).

Each of the above mentioned methods will be briefly described. The method of using the original image as it is as the sub image uses the original image as it is as the first sub image. Furthermore, the original image is used as it is as the second sub-image. By using this method, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced because a circuit for creating a sub-image is not operated or it is not necessary to use the circuit itself. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device, the first
It is preferable to use this method after performing frame rate conversion in which an intermediate image determined by motion compensation is an interpolated image in the step of. The reason is that, by making the intermediate image obtained by the motion compensation as the interpolation image, the same image is repeatedly displayed while smoothing the motion of the moving image, the moving image is caused by the shortage of the writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance of the liquid crystal element. This is because it is possible to reduce obstacles such as tailing and afterimage.

Next, in the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the method of setting the brightness of the image and the length of the period in which the sub-image is displayed will be described in detail. Here, J represents the number of sub-images and is an integer of 2 or more. Lower case j is distinguished from upper case J. It is assumed that j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less.
The brightness of the pixel in normal hold driving is L, and the period of the original image data is T,
The brightness L _j of the pixels in the sub-image of the _j, the length T _j of the period in which the sub image is displayed in the first _j, and when taking a product for L _j and T _j, from which the j = 1 Sum up to j = J (L
It is preferable that ₁ T ₁ + L ₂ T ₂ +... + L _J T _J ) be equal to the product of L and T (LT) (brightness does not change). Furthermore, the _{T j,} the sum of j = 1 through _{j = J (T 1 + T} 2 + ··· + T J) is that is equal to the T (the display period of the original image is maintained) of preferable. Here, that the brightness is unchanged and the display cycle of the original image is maintained is referred to as a sub-image distribution condition.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is a method of making at least one sub-image a black image. By doing this, the display method can be simulated in an impulse type, so that it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the display method being a hold type. Here, in order to prevent the decrease in brightness of the display image accompanying the insertion of the black image, it is preferable to follow the sub-image distribution conditions. However, in the case where the decrease in the brightness of the display image is acceptable (such as when the surroundings are dark), the sub-image is set if the user is set such that the decrease in the brightness of the display image is acceptable. It is not necessary to follow the distribution conditions. For example, one sub-image may be the same as the original image, and the other sub-image may be a black image. In this case, power consumption can be reduced compared to when the sub image distribution condition is followed. Furthermore, in the liquid crystal display device, when it is assumed that one of the sub-images has the overall brightness of the original image increased without limiting the maximum value of the brightness, the brightness of the backlight should be increased. Sub-image distribution conditions may be realized. In this case, since the sub image distribution condition can be satisfied without controlling the voltage value written to the pixel, the operation of the image processing circuit can be omitted, and power consumption can be reduced.

The black insertion method is characterized in that L _{j of} all pixels is 0 in any one sub-image. By this means, since the display method can be simulated in an impulse type, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the display method being a hold type.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time division gradation control method divides the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, and when controlling the brightness in the ranges, all The method is performed by only one sub-image among the sub-images of. By doing this, the display method can be pseudo-impulse-type without lowering the brightness, so that it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image caused by the hold-type display method.

As a method of dividing the brightness of the original image into multiple ranges, the maximum value of brightness (L _max ),
There is a method of dividing by the number of sub-images. This is because, for example, in a display device in which the brightness from 0 to L _max can be adjusted in 256 steps (tone 0 to tone 255), when the number of sub-images is 2, tone 0 to tone 127 To display the brightness of one sub-image in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255, while setting the brightness of the other sub-image to gradation 0,
When displaying from gray level 128 to gray level 255, the brightness of one sub image is gray level 255
On the other hand, the brightness of the other sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255. By doing this, the original image can be perceived by the human eye as if it were displayed, and since it can be pseudo-impulse-type, the quality of the moving image is degraded due to being of the hold-type. You can prevent. The number of sub-images may be larger than two. For example, if the number of sub-images is three, the brightness level of the original image (gradation 0 to gradation 2
55) is divided into three. Depending on the number of brightness levels of the original image and the number of sub-images, the number of brightness levels may not be divisible by the number of sub-images, but it is included in the range of each brightness after division The number of stages of brightness may be distributed as appropriate, even if not exactly the same.

Also in the time-division gradation control method, it is preferable to satisfy the sub-image distribution condition, since the same image as the original image can be displayed without a decrease in brightness and the like.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the gamma complement method makes one sub-image a bright image with the gamma characteristics of the original image changed and the other sub-image the gamma of the original image. It is a method to make it a dark image whose characteristics are changed. By doing this, the display method can be pseudo-impulse-type without lowering the brightness, so that it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image caused by the hold-type display method. Here, the gamma characteristic is the degree of brightness with respect to the brightness level (gradation). Usually, the gamma characteristic is adjusted to be close to linear. This is because if the change in brightness is proportional to the gray level, which is the level of brightness, a smooth gray level can be obtained. In the gamma complement method, the gamma characteristics of one sub-image are shifted from linear and adjusted to be brighter than linear in the middle brightness (halftone) region (halftone becomes an image brighter than the original) )
. Then, the gamma characteristics of the other sub-image are also deviated from linear, and adjusted so as to be darker than linear in the same half tone region (half tone becomes an image darker than originally). Here, the amount by which one sub-image is brighter than linear and the amount by which the other sub-image is darker than linear
It is preferable to make them approximately equal in all gradations. In this way, the original image can be perceived by the human eye as if it were displayed, and degradation of the quality of the moving image due to being of the hold type can be prevented. The number of sub-images may be larger than two. For example, if the number of sub-images is three, then the gamma characteristics are adjusted for each of the three sub-images so that the sum of the linear to brightening amount and the sum of the linear to darkening amount are approximately equal. Good.

Also in the gamma complement method, it is preferable to satisfy the sub-image distribution condition because the same image as the original image can be displayed without a decrease in brightness or the like. further,
In the gamma complement method, the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, so that each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself.
It has the advantage of also improving the quality of the image perceived by the human eye in the end.

A method of using an intermediate image determined by motion compensation as a sub image is a method of setting one sub image as an intermediate image determined by motion compensation from preceding and succeeding images. By doing this, the motion of the image can be smoothed, so the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Next, the relationship between the timing of displaying the sub image and the method of creating the sub image will be described. The timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step, and the timing for displaying the second sub-image is the source determined in the first step Although it can be determined arbitrarily regardless of the timing of displaying the image, the sub-image itself may be changed according to the timing of displaying the second sub-image. By doing this, even if the timing of displaying the second sub-image is variously changed, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed. Specifically, when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is advanced, the first sub-image is made brighter, and the second
Sub-images can be darker. Furthermore, if the timing to display the second sub-image is delayed, the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. This is because the brightness perceived by the human eye changes depending on the length of the period in which the image is displayed. More specifically, the brightness perceived by human eyes is brighter as the image display period is longer, and is darker as the image display period is shorter. That is, by shortening the timing of displaying the second sub image, the length of the period in which the first sub image is displayed is shortened, and the length of the period in which the second sub image is displayed is increased. As it is, the first sub-image is dark and the second sub-image is bright and perceived by human eyes. As a result, an image different from the original image will be perceived by the human eye.
The second sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. Similarly, the second
By delaying the timing of displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period of displaying the first sub-image becomes longer, and the length of the period of displaying the second sub-image becomes shorter. The sub-image may be darker and the second sub-image may be brighter.

Based on the above description, the processing procedure in the second step is shown below.
As procedure 1, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image is determined. More specifically, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images includes a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, It can be selected from the methods used as
In step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined. Here, J is an integer of 2 or more.
In step 3, the brightness L _j of the pixel in the j-th sub-image and the length T _{j of the} period in which the j-th sub-image is displayed are determined according to the method selected in step 1. In procedure 3, the length of the period in which each sub-image is displayed and the brightness of each pixel included in each sub-image are specifically determined.
In step 4, the original image is processed and actually displayed according to the items determined in each of steps 1 to 3.
In step 5, move the target original image to the next original image. Then, return to step 1.

The mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step may be implemented in the device or may be determined in advance at the design stage of the device. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is implemented in the device, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. Note that the conditions mentioned here are the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Includes altitude, acceleration, travel speed, etc., user settings, software versions, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is determined in advance at the design stage of the apparatus, the drive circuit optimum for each drive method can be used, and the mechanism is determined. Thus, it is possible to expect a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects.

Next, various driving methods determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail by specifically showing the values of n and m in the first step.

When the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in procedure 1 in the second step, the driving method is as follows.

I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that can make the plurality of pixels have unique brightness L, respectively.
The j-th (j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less) sub-image is configured by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having unique brightness L _j, and is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j It is an image,
A method of driving a display device satisfying a sub image distribution condition, wherein L, T, L _j and T _j satisfy the sub image distribution condition,
In all j, the brightness L _j of each pixel included in the j-th sub-image is characterized by L _j = L for each pixel.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared in a fixed cycle T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above driving method.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in procedure 3, the above-mentioned driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like.
In FIG. 85, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents the cases of the various n and m used in the first step.

For example, in the first step, when n = 1, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1, a driving method as shown at n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. Become. At this time, the display frame rate is twice the frame rate of the input image data (double speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (driven at 120 Hz). Then, an image is displayed twice continuously for one input image data. Here, in the case of double-speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than double speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than double speed. Furthermore, in step 1 of the second step,
By selecting a method that uses the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image can be stopped by motion compensation or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, so power consumption and device manufacturing cost Can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or an integer fraction of that (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz)
, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to such an extent that it can not be perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately half of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 2, m = 1, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m)
When 2) is 2, the driving method is as shown at n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is four times the frame rate of the input image data (quadruple speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, an image is displayed four times consecutively for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of quadruple speed drive, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than quadruple speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than quadruple speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of write voltage shortage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable for failures such as tailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction of it (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄4 of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 1, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m)
When d) is 3, the driving method is as shown at n = 3 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is six times the frame rate of the input image data (6-fold speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 360 Hz (360 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed six times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 6 × speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than 6 × speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 6 × speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of write voltage shortage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable for failures such as tailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 360 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 360 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction of it (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄6 of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 2, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m)
When 3) is 3/2, the driving method is as shown at n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is three times (three times faster) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, an image is displayed three times consecutively for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Where 3
In the case of double speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than triple speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than triple speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 180 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 180 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction of it (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1⁄3 of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 1, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m)
When d) is 4, the driving method is as shown at n = 4 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is eight times (eight-fold speed drive) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 480 Hz (driven at 480 Hz). Then, an image is continuously displayed eight times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8 × speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger 8 × speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of write voltage shortage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable for failures such as tailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and 480 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 480 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or an integer fraction (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄8 of the cycle of input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 3, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m)
When 4) is 4/3, the driving method is as shown at n = 4 and m = 3 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is 8/3 times the frame rate of the input image data (8
/ 3x speed drive). Specifically, for example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 160 Hz (160 Hz drive). Then, images are continuously displayed eight times for three input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8 / 3-speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8 / 3-speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with those larger than 8 / 3-speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage.
Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 160 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 160 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction (for example, 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 320 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 3⁄8 of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 1, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m
When the value of 5) is 5, the driving method is as shown at n = 5 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is 10 times (10 × speed drive) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 600 Hz (600 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed ten times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. here,
In the case of 10-fold speed drive, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than 10-fold speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with those larger than 10-fold speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 600 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 600 Hz and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.) It can be reduced to an extent that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1/10 of the cycle of input image data.

Furthermore, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 2, ie, the conversion ratio (n / m
When 5) is 5/2, the driving method is as shown at n = 5 and m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is five times the frame rate of the input image data (five-fold speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed five times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 5 × speed driving, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than in the case where the frame rate is smaller than 5 × speed, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 5 × speed. Furthermore, the second
In step 1 of the above step, the method of using the original image as a sub-image as it is is selected, so that the operation of the circuit for creating the intermediate image can be stopped by motion compensation or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 300 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz, the frequency of alternating current driving is an integral multiple or an integer fraction
For example, by setting the frequency to 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to such an extent that human eyes do not perceive it. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1⁄5 of the period of the input image data.

Thus, in procedure 1 in the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected,
In procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2,
If it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T1 = T2 = T / 2, then the first
Since the display frame rate can be further doubled with respect to the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the above step, the quality of moving pictures can be further improved. Furthermore, the quality of moving pictures can be improved as compared to the case where the display frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared to the case where the display frame rate is larger than the display frame rate.
Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. further,
By increasing the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or an integral fraction of that frequency, it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to such an extent that human eyes do not perceive it. Furthermore, the response time of the liquid crystal element of the period of the input image data
The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device which is approximately 1 / (twice of a conversion ratio)).

Although the detailed description has been omitted, it is apparent that similar advantages can be obtained in cases other than the conversion ratios mentioned above. For example, in the range where n is 10 or less, in addition to those listed above,
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (10/3 speed drive, 200 Hz)
,
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5 / 2-speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (12 × drive, 720 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (12/5 double speed drive, 144 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (14 × drive, 840 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7 × speed drive, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (14/3 double speed drive, 280 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7 / 2-speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (14/5 double speed drive, 168 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/3 speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (16 × driving, 960 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (16/3 speed drive, 320 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (16/5 speed drive, 192 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (16/7 double speed drive, 137 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (18 × drive, 1080 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9 × driving, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9 / 2-speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (18/5 speed drive, 216 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (18/7 double speed drive, 154 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/4 speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (20 × drive, 1200 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (20 / 3-speed driving, 400 H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (20/7 double speed drive, 171 H
z),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (20/9 double speed drive, 133 H
z),
Combinations of the above are conceivable. The notation of frequency is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, and for the other input frame rates, a value obtained by integrating two times each conversion ratio with the input frame rate is the driving frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, it is obvious that the procedure in the second step can be applied to various n and m, although specific numbers of n and m are not listed. .

When J = 2, it is particularly effective if the conversion ratio in the first step is larger than 2. This is because, in the second step, if the number of sub-images is relatively reduced to J = 2, the conversion ratio in the first step can be increased accordingly. Such conversion ratios are 3, 4, 5, 5/2, 6, 7 in the range where n is 10 or less.
, 7/2, 7/3, 8, 8/3, 9, 9/2, 9/4, 10, 10/3, and the like.
When the display frame rate after the first step is such a value, the advantage of reducing the number of sub-images in the second step by setting J = 3 or more (such as reduction of power consumption and manufacturing cost) In addition, it is possible to make the advantages of the large final display frame rate (improvement of moving picture quality, reduction of flicker, etc.) compatible with each other.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where it is determined that T ₂ = T / 2 has been described, it is apparent that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T ₁ <T ₂ , it is possible to make the first sub-image brighter and the second sub-image darker. Furthermore, the second
If it is determined in step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in the procedure 1 as in the above-described driving method, the brightness of the sub image may be displayed as it is without being changed. This is because, in this case, since the image used as the sub image is the same, the original image can be properly displayed regardless of the display timing of the sub image.

Furthermore, it is obvious that in the procedure 2, the number J of sub-images may be determined not to 2 but to any other value. In this case, as compared with the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step, the display frame rate can be further increased to a J-fold frame rate, thereby further improving the moving picture quality. Is possible. Furthermore, the quality of moving pictures can be improved as compared to the case where the display frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared to the case where the display frame rate is larger than the display frame rate. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, by increasing the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the frequency of AC drive to an integral multiple or integral fraction thereof, the flicker appearing by the AC drive can be reduced to such an extent that it can not be perceived by human eyes. it can. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of the input image data.

For example, when J = 3, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is less than 3, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the number of sub-images is greater than 3 Have an advantage. Furthermore, the response time of the liquid crystal element of the input image data period (1
The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device which is approximately / (3 times the conversion ratio)).

Furthermore, for example, when J = 4, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the number of sub-images is larger than 4 It has the advantage of being able to Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (4 times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 5, the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is less than 5, and power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the number of sub-images is greater than 5 It has the advantage of being able to Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (5 times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of input image data.

Furthermore, even if J is other than those listed above, it has similar advantages.

When J = 3 or more, the conversion ratio in the first step can take various values, but in particular, when the conversion ratio in the first step is relatively small (2 or less), J = 3
It is effective to set it as above. This is because if the display frame rate after the first step is relatively small, J can be increased in the second step accordingly. Such conversion ratios are 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, and so on in the range where n is 10 or less.
5/3, 5/4, 6/5, 7/4, 7/5, 7/6, 8/7, 9/5, 9/7, 9/8,
10/7 and 10/9. Among them, the conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, 5 /
The cases of 3 and 5/4 are illustrated in FIG. As described above, when the display frame rate after the first step is a relatively small value, the advantage of the small display frame rate in the first step can be obtained by setting J to 3 or more (power consumption and manufacturing cost). It is possible to simultaneously achieve the advantages (reduction of moving image, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to the reduction of the display frame rate and the large final display frame rate.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that can make the plurality of pixels have unique brightness L, respectively.
The j-th (j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less) sub-image is configured by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having unique brightness L _j, and is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j It is an image,
A method of driving a display device satisfying a sub image distribution condition, wherein L, T, L _j and T _j satisfy the sub image distribution condition,
In at least one j, the brightness L _{j of} all the pixels contained in the j-th sub-image is L _j
It is characterized in that = 0.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared in a fixed cycle T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above driving method.

It is apparent that the above driving method can be implemented in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in procedure 3, the above-mentioned driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like.
The features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 85 have already been described, so detailed description is omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, the brightness of the original image It is apparent that the same method is obtained even when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the image into a plurality of sub-images. For example, in the case where the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of moving pictures can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to an extent that is not perceived by the human eye

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of the black insertion method being selected is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. The operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device.
Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, since the display method of the impulse type can be simulated in a pseudo manner regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where it is determined that T ₂ = T / 2 has been described, it is apparent that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T ₁ <T ₂ , it is possible to make the first sub-image brighter and the second sub-image darker. Furthermore, the second
If it is determined in step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, as in the driving method described above, when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1, the brightness of the sub-image is not changed It may be displayed as it is. because,
In this case, when the brightness of the sub-image is not changed, the entire brightness of the original image is only displayed dark. That is, by actively using this method for controlling the brightness of the display device, it is possible to control the brightness while improving the quality of the moving image.

Furthermore, it is obvious that in the procedure 2, the number J of sub-images may be determined not to 2 but to any other value. Since the advantage in that case has already been described, the detailed description is omitted here, but in the procedure 1 in the second step, the black insertion method is one of the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. It is clear that the selected advantages have similar advantages. For example, the response time of the liquid crystal element is 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data
The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device which is about double.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the time division gradation control method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub images, the driving method is as follows.

I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that can make the plurality of pixels have unique brightness L, respectively.
The specific brightness L has a maximum value of L _max ,
The j-th (j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less) sub-image is configured by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having unique brightness L _j, and is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j It is an image,
A method of driving a display device satisfying a sub image distribution condition, wherein L, T, L _j and T _j satisfy the sub image distribution condition,
In order to display the unique brightness L, (j-1) × L _max / J to J × L _max
The adjustment of the brightness in the range of the brightness of / J is performed by the adjustment of the brightness in only one sub-image display period among the J sub-image display periods.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared in a fixed cycle T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above driving method.

It is apparent that the above driving method can be implemented in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in procedure 3, the above-mentioned driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like.
The features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 85 have already been described, so detailed description is omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, the brightness of the original image It is apparent that the same advantages can be obtained even in the case where the time division tone control method is selected among the methods of distributing H.sub.2 to a plurality of sub-images. For example, in the case where the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of moving pictures can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to an extent that is not perceived by the human eye

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of selecting the time-division gradation control method is that an intermediate image is obtained by motion compensation. It is possible to reduce the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device, since the operation of the circuit that creates the can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device. further,
Since the display method of the impulse type can be simulated, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the brightness of the display device does not decrease, thereby further reducing power consumption.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where it is determined that T ₂ = T / 2 has been described, it is apparent that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T ₁ <T ₂ , it is possible to make the first sub-image brighter and the second sub-image darker. Furthermore, the second
If it is determined in step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Furthermore, it is obvious that in the procedure 2, the number J of sub-images may be determined not to 2 but to any other value. Since the advantage in that case has already been described, detailed explanation will be omitted here, but in the procedure 1 in the second step, time-division gradation among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images It is clear that the same advantages are obtained when the control method is chosen. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in procedure 1 in the second step, when the gamma complement method is selected, the driving method is as follows.

I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that can make the plurality of pixels have unique brightness L, respectively.
The j-th (j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less) sub-image is configured by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having unique brightness L _j, and is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j It is an image,
A method of driving a display device satisfying a sub image distribution condition, wherein L, T, L _j and T _j satisfy the sub image distribution condition,
In each sub-image, the characteristic of the change in brightness with respect to gradation is shifted from linear, and the sum of the amount of brightness shifted from linear to bright and the sum of the amount of brightness shifted from linear to dark , Substantially equal in all gradations.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared in a fixed cycle T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above driving method.

It is apparent that the above driving method can be implemented in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in procedure 3, the above-mentioned driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like.
The features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 85 have already been described, so detailed description is omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, the brightness of the original image It is apparent that among the methods of distributing H.sub.i.sup.2 to a plurality of sub-images, similar advantages are obtained even when the gamma complementation method is selected. For example, in the case where the interpolation image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of moving pictures can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of the shortage of the write voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the image quality improvement effect is particularly remarkable with respect to a failure such as tailing of a moving image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce flicker that appears due to AC drive to an extent that is not perceived by the human eye

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of the gamma complementation method being selected is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Power consumption and manufacturing costs of the device can be reduced because the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device. Further, since the display method of the impulse type can be simulated in a pseudo manner regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved. Further, the sub-image may be obtained by direct gamma conversion of the image data. In this case, there is an advantage that the gamma value can be controlled variously depending on the size of the motion of the moving image and the like. Furthermore, the image data may not be directly gamma converted, and a sub-image in which the gamma value is changed may be obtained by changing the reference voltage of the digital analog conversion circuit (DAC). In this case, since the image data is not directly gamma converted, the circuit that performs gamma conversion can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, so power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. . Furthermore, in the gamma complement method, the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, so that each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly on its own, and finally the human being It has the advantage of also improving the quality of the image perceived by the human eye.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where it is determined that T ₂ = T / 2 has been described, it is apparent that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T ₁ <T ₂ , it is possible to make the first sub-image brighter and the second sub-image darker. Furthermore, the second
If it is determined in step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, the procedure 1
In the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, if the gamma method is selected, the gamma value may be changed when the brightness of the sub-image is changed. That is, the gamma value may be determined according to the display timing of the second sub-image. In this way, the circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, so power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is obvious that in the procedure 2, the number J of sub-images may be determined not to 2 but to any other value. Since the advantage in that case has already been described, detailed explanation will be omitted here, but in the procedure 1 in the second step, time-division gradation among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images It is clear that the same advantages are obtained when the control method is chosen. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail.

In procedure 1 in the second step, a method is selected in which an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as a sub image,
In procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2,
When it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T1 = T2 = T / 2, the second
The driving method determined by the procedure in the step is as follows.

I-th (i is a positive integer) image data,
The (i + 1) th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The kth (k is a positive integer) image,
The kth +1 image,
A method of driving a display device, which sequentially displays the (k + 2) th image at an interval of 1/2 times the period of the original image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by halving the motion from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data.
The (k + 2) -th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared in a fixed cycle T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above driving method.

It is apparent that the above driving method can be implemented in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

A characteristic advantage of the method of using an intermediate image determined by motion compensation as a sub-image in procedure 1 in the second step is that the intermediate image determined by motion compensation in the procedure of the first step is When making it an interpolation image, the method of calculating | requiring the intermediate image used in the 1st step is a point which can be used by the 2nd step as it is. That is, since the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image by motion compensation can be used not only in the first step but also in the second step, the circuit can be effectively used and processing efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the motion of the image can be further smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where it is determined that T ₂ = T / 2 has been described, it is apparent that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if it is determined in step 3 in the second step that T ₁ <T ₂ , it is possible to make the first sub-image brighter and the second sub-image darker. Furthermore, the second
If it is determined in step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be perceived properly by the human eye, and the display can be artificially driven by impulse, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above drive method, in step 2,
When a method of using an intermediate image determined by motion compensation as a sub image is selected, the brightness of the sub image may not be changed. This is because, since the image in the intermediate state is completed as an image by itself, even if the display timing of the second sub-image changes, it does not change as an image perceived by human eyes. In this case, the circuit for changing the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, so that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is obvious that in the procedure 2, the number J of sub-images may be determined not to 2 but to any other value. Since the advantage in that case has already been described, the detailed description is omitted here, but the same applies to the case where the method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub image is selected in procedure 1 in the second step. It is obvious to have the following advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method in the case where the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different will be described. In the method shown in FIGS. 87A to 87C, it is assumed that the circular area on the image is an area where the position changes according to the frame, and the triangular area on the image is an area where the position hardly changes according to the frame. There is. However,
This is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. The method of FIGS. 87 (A) to (C) can be applied to various images.

FIG. 87A shows the case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (the conversion ratio is 2). When the conversion ratio is 2, it has the advantage that the quality of moving pictures can be improved more than when the conversion ratio is smaller than 2. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 2, it has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced more than when the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Figure 87 (
A) schematically represents the state of temporal change of the displayed image, with the horizontal axis as time. Here, the image of interest is described as a p-th image (p is a positive integer). Then, an image to be displayed next to the image of interest is a (p + 1) th image,
For convenience, it is described how far away from the image of interest the image displayed before the image of interest is displayed, such as the (p-1) image. To be. The image 180701 is a p-th image, the image 180702 is a (p + 1) th image, the image 180703 is a (p + 2) th image, the image 180704 is a (p + 3) th image,
It is assumed that 80705 is the (p + 4) th image. The period Tin represents the period of input image data. Note that FIG. 87A shows the case where the conversion ratio is 2;
Is twice as long as the period from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) -th image.

Here, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is the pth image 180701 to the (p + 2) th image.
The image may be an intermediate state of the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image 180703 by detecting the amount of change in the image up to the image 180703 of the image. In FIG. 87 (A), the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by the area where the position changes according to the frame (circular area) and the area where the position does not substantially change according to the frame (triangular area). That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is a middle position between the position in the p-th image 180701 and the position in the (p + 2) -th image 180703. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. As described above, by performing motion compensation on an object moving on an image and interpolating image data, smooth display can be performed.

Further, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is the same as the pth image 180701 and the (p + 2) th image.
The image 180703 may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule after the image 180703 is created to be in the intermediate state. The constant rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 87A, where L is a representative luminance of the p th image 180701 and L c is a representative luminance of the (p + 1) th image 180702. Lc may have a relationship of L> Lc. Desirably,
There may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <L
There may be a relationship of c <0.5L. Or, conversely, there may be a relationship of L <Lc between L and Lc. Desirably, there may be a relation of 0.1Lc <L <0.8Lc.
More desirably, there may be a relation of 0.2Lc <L <0.5Lc. By doing so, since the display can be simulated in an impulse type, it is possible to suppress the afterimage of the eye.

The representative luminance of the image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Thus, two different causes for motion blur (the motion of the image is not smooth,
By solving the image and the afterimage of the eye at the same time, it is possible to significantly reduce the motion blur.

Furthermore, the (p + 2) -th image 180703 is also applied to the (p + 3) -th image 180704.
And the (p + 4) th image 180705 using the same method. That is, the (p + 3) th image 180704 is compared with the (p + 2) th image 180703 to the
The (p + 2) th image 1 is detected by detecting the amount of change in the image up to the image 180705 of +4).
The image may be an intermediate state of the image 80705 and the (p + 4) th image 180705, and may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule.

FIG. 87B shows the case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (the conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 87 (B) schematically shows how an image displayed is temporally changed, with the horizontal axis representing time. The image 180711 is the p-th image, the image 1807
12 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180713 is the (p + 2) th image, the image 180714
Is the (p + 3) th image, the image 180715 is the (p + 4) th image, the image 180716 is the (p + 5) th image, and the image 180717 is the (p + 6) th image. The period Tin represents the period of input image data. Note that FIG. 87B shows the case where the conversion ratio is 3; therefore, the period Tin is three times the period until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed after the p-th image is displayed. It will be the length.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 are detected by detecting the amount of change in the image from the p-th image 180711 to the (p + 3) -th image 180714. And the (p + 3) th image 180714 may be an intermediate state image. In FIG. 87 (B), the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by the area where the position changes according to the frame (circular area) and the area where the position does not substantially change according to the frame (triangular area). That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) th image 180713 is located intermediate between the position in the pth image 180711 and the position in the (p + 3) th image 180714. Specifically, when the amount of movement of the circular area detected from the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) -th image 180714 is X, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is It may be a position displaced about (1/3) X from the position in the p-th image 180711. Furthermore, the (p + 2) th image 1807
The position of the circular area at 13 is calculated from the position at the p th image 180
) It may be a position displaced by about X. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) th image 180713 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. As described above, by performing motion compensation on an object moving on an image and interpolating image data, smooth display can be performed.

Furthermore, the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) th image 180713 are created to be in the intermediate state between the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and the brightness of the image is constant. It may be an image controlled by the rule of. The constant rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the representative luminance of the p-th image 180711 is L,
The representative luminance of the image 180712 of p + 1) is Lc1, the (p + 2) th image 180713
When Lc2 represents a representative luminance of L, L> Lc1 or Lc in L, Lc1 and Lc2.
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or conversely, in L, Lc1 and Lc2, there may be a relation of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relation of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, since the display can be simulated in an impulse type, it is possible to suppress the afterimage of the eye. Alternatively, images in which the brightness is changed may be alternately displayed. By doing this, it is possible to shorten the cycle in which the luminance changes, so it is possible to reduce flicker.

Thus, two different causes for motion blur (the motion of the image is not smooth,
By solving the image and the afterimage of the eye at the same time, it is possible to significantly reduce the motion blur.

Furthermore, the (p + 4) th image 180715 and the (p + 5) th image 180716 may also be created using the same method from the (p + 3) th image 180714 and the (p + 6) th image 180717. That is, the (p + 4) th image 180715 and the (p + 5) th image 180716 are detected by detecting the amount of change in the image from the (p + 3) th image 180714 to the (p + 6) th image 180717. Picture 18071 of
The image may be an intermediate state of the 4th and (p + 6) th image 180717, and may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule.

Note that when the method of FIG. 87B is used, the display frame rate is large, so that the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eye well, and the movement of the image can be displayed smoothly. Can be significantly reduced.

In FIG. 87 (C), the display frame rate is 1.5 times the input frame rate (a conversion ratio of 1.5
Represents the case of). FIG. 87 (C) schematically shows the state of temporal change of the displayed image, in which the horizontal axis is time. Image 180721 is the p-th image, image 1
80722 is the (p + 1) th image, image 180723 is the (p + 2) th image, image 180
It is assumed that 724 is the (p + 3) th image. Although the image 180725 may not actually be displayed, the image 180725 is input image data, and the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p
A +2) image 180723 may be used to create. The period Tin represents the period of input image data. Since FIG. 87C shows the case where the conversion ratio is 1.5, period Tin is one of the periods from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) -th image. .5 times the length.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are from the p-th image 180721 to the image (p + 3) 180724 via the image 180725.
It may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724 by detecting the amount of change in the images up to. In FIG. 87C, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) in which the position changes according to the frame and a region (a triangular region) in which the position does not substantially change according to the frame.
That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p + 2) th image 180723 is located intermediate between the position in the pth image 180721 and the position in the (p + 3) th image 180724. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180
The 722 and the (p + 2) th image 180723 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. As described above, by performing motion compensation on an object moving on an image and interpolating image data, smooth display can be performed.

Furthermore, the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p + 2) th image 180723 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the pth image 180721 and the (p + 3) th image 180724, and the brightness of the image is constant. It may be an image controlled by the rule of. The constant rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the representative luminance of the p-th image 180721 is L,
The representative luminance of the image 180722 of p + 1) is Lc1, the (p + 2) th image 180723
When Lc2 represents a representative luminance of L, L> Lc1 or Lc in L, Lc1 and Lc2.
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or conversely, in L, Lc1 and Lc2, there may be a relation of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relation of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, since the display can be simulated in an impulse type, it is possible to suppress the afterimage of the eye. Alternatively, images in which the brightness is changed may be alternately displayed. By doing this, it is possible to shorten the cycle in which the luminance changes, so it is possible to reduce flicker.

Thus, two different causes for motion blur (the motion of the image is not smooth,
By solving the image and the afterimage of the eye at the same time, it is possible to significantly reduce the motion blur.

Note that when the method in FIG. 87C is used, the display frame rate is small; therefore, the time for writing a signal to the display device can be lengthened. Therefore, since the clock frequency of the display device can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced. In addition, since the processing speed for performing motion compensation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, representative luminance of the image will be described. Figures 88 (A) through (D)
The figure shown in) schematically represents the state of temporal change of the displayed image, with the horizontal axis as time. FIG. 88E shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of an image in a certain area.

As a method of measuring the brightness of the image, there is a method of measuring the brightness individually for each of the pixels constituting the image. Using this method, it is possible to measure the brightness precisely to the details of the image.

However, since the method of measuring the luminance individually for each of the pixels constituting the image is very laborious, another method may be used. Another way to measure the brightness of an image is to focus on an area in the image and measure the average brightness of that area. By this method, the brightness of the image can be easily measured. In the present embodiment, the luminance obtained by the method of measuring the average luminance of a certain area in an image is conveniently referred to as the representative luminance of the image.

Then, in order to obtain representative luminance of an image, a point as to which region in the image is to be focused will be described below.

FIG. 88A shows an example of a method of setting the luminance of a region (a triangular region) whose position does not substantially change with respect to the change of the image as a representative luminance of the image. Period Tin is a period of input image data, image 180801 is a p-th image, image 180802 is a (p + 1) -th image, image 18
0803 is the (p + 2) th image, the first area 180804 is the luminance measurement area in the pth image 180801, the second area 180805 is the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) th image 180802, and the third area 180806 is the The luminance measurement areas in the image 180803 of (p + 2) are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be approximately the same as the spatial position in the device. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to determine the representative temporal change of the luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether the display is pseudo-impulse-type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180804 may be L,
Assuming that the luminance measured in the second region 180805 is Lc, if Lc <L, it can be said that the display is pseudo-impulsive. At this time, it can be said that the quality of moving pictures is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the representative amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) with respect to the change in time is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger of the first region 180804 and the second region 180805, the second region 180805 and the third region 180806, and the first region 180804 and the third region 180806, respectively, is used. It can be a ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the typical amount of change in luminance of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. And if relative brightness is 80% or less, the quality of a moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative brightness is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of moving images can be significantly improved, and power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88B shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the tile-divided area and using the average value as the representative luminance of the image. Period Tin is a period of input image data, image 1808
11 is the p-th image, the image 180812 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180813 is the
The first area 180814 is the luminance measurement area in the pth image 180811, the second area 180815 is the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) th image 180812, and the third area 180816 is the (p + 2) th image. The luminance measurement areas in the image 180813 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be approximately the same as the spatial position in the device. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to determine the representative temporal change of the luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether the display is pseudo-impulse-type. For example, let Lc <L, where L is the average value of all the luminances measured in the first region 180814 and Lc is the average value of all the luminances measured in the second region 180815. For example, it can be said that the display is pseudo impulse type. At this time, it can be said that the quality of moving pictures is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the representative amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) with respect to the change in time is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger of the first area 180814 and the second area 180815, the second area 180815 and the third area 180816, and the first area 180814 and the third area 180816, respectively. It can be a ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the typical amount of change in luminance of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. And if relative brightness is 80% or less, the quality of a moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative brightness is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of moving images can be significantly improved, and power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88C shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the central region of the image and using the average value as the representative luminance of the image. A period Tin is a cycle of input image data, an image 180821 is ap image, an image 180822 is an (p + 1) image, an image 180823 is an (p + 2) image, and a first region 180824 is a luminance in the pth image 180821 The measurement area, the second area 180825 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) th image 180822, and the third area 180826 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 2) th image 180823.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether the display is pseudo-impulse-type. For example, if the luminance measured in the first region 180824 is L,
Assuming that the luminance measured in the second region 180825 is Lc, if Lc <L, it can be said that the display is pseudo-impulse type. At this time, it can be said that the quality of moving pictures is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the representative amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) with respect to the change in time is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger of the first region 180824 and the second region 180825, the second region 180825 and the third region 180826, and the first region 180824 and the third region 180826, respectively, is used. It can be a ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the typical amount of change in luminance of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. And if relative brightness is 80% or less, the quality of a moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative brightness is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of moving images can be significantly improved, and power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88D shows an example of a method of measuring the luminances of a plurality of points sampled from the entire image and using the average value as the representative luminance of the image. Period Tin is a cycle of input image data,
The image 180831 is a p-th image, the image 180832 is a (p + 1) -th image, an image 1808
The 33rd is the (p + 2) th image, the first area 180834 is the luminance measurement area in the pth image 180831, the second area 180835 is the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) th image 180832, and the third area 180836 is the third The luminance measurement areas in the image 180833 of (p + 2) are respectively shown.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether the display is pseudo-impulse-type. For example, let Lc <L, where L is the average value of all the luminances measured in the first region 180834 and Lc is the average value of all the luminances measured in the second region 180835. For example, it can be said that the display is pseudo impulse type. At this time, it can be said that the quality of moving pictures is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the representative amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) with respect to the change in time is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, larger ones of the first region 180834 and the second region 180835, the second region 180835 and the third region 180836, and the first region 180834 and the third region 180836, respectively. It can be a ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the typical amount of change in luminance of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. And if relative brightness is 80% or less, the quality of a moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of moving pictures can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative brightness is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of moving images can be significantly improved, and power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88 (E) is a diagram showing a measurement method in the luminance measurement region in the diagrams shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to (D). An area 180841 is a luminance measurement area of interest, and a point 180842 is a luminance measurement point in the area 180841. As the luminance measurement device with high time resolution may have a small measurement target range, when the area 180841 is large, it is not necessary to measure the entire area, but as shown in FIG. The brightness may be measured at a plurality of points without any bias, and the average value may be used as the luminance of the region 180841.

When the image has a combination of three primary colors of R, G and B, the measured luminance is R and G.
, And B may be combined luminance, R and G combined luminance, G and B combined luminance, and B and R combined luminance, or each of R, G, and B. It may be luminance.

Next, a method of detecting an image movement included in input image data and creating an intermediate state image,
A method of controlling the driving method in accordance with the movement of the image included in the input image data will be described.

Referring to FIG. 89, an example of a method of detecting an image movement included in input image data and creating an intermediate state image will be described. FIG. 89A shows the case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (the conversion ratio is 2). FIG. 89A schematically shows a method of detecting the movement of the image with the horizontal axis representing time. A period Tin is a period of input image data, an image 180901 is a p-th image, and an image 180902 is a (p + 1) -th image.
, The image 180903 represents the (p + 2) -th image, respectively. In addition, a first region 180904, a second region 180905, and a third region 180906 are provided in the image as time-independent regions.

First, in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-like regions, and image data in a third region 180906, which is one of the regions, is focused.

Next, in the p-th image 180901, a range larger than the third region 180906 centered on the third region 180906 is focused. Here, a range larger than the third area 180906 centered on the third area 180906 is a data search range. The data search range is 180907 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 in the vertical direction (Y direction).
We assume 08. The horizontal range 180907 and the vertical range 180908 of the data search range may be a range obtained by expanding the horizontal range and the vertical range of the third region 180906 by about 15 pixels.

Then, within the data search range, a region having image data most similar to the image data in the third region 180906 is searched. The search method can use the least squares method or the like. As a region having the most similar image data as a result of the search, the first region 18090
Suppose that 4 is derived.

Next, a vector 180909 is derived as a quantity representing the difference in position between the derived first area 180904 and the third area 180906. The vector 180909 is called a motion vector.

Then, in the (p + 1) th image 180902, the vector obtained from the motion vector 180909, the image data in the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903, and the first region in the p-th image 180901 The image data in 180904 form a second region 180905.

Here, a vector obtained from the motion vector 180909 will be referred to as a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 has a role of determining the position forming the second region 180905. Second region 180905 is formed at a position separated from third region 180906 by displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180909 by a coefficient (1/2).

The image data in the second region 180905 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 is the image data in the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903, and
It may be determined by the image data in the first area 180904 in the image 180901 of FIG. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180902
The image data in 05 is the third area 18090 in the (p + 2) th image 180903.
6 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180904 of the p-th image 180901.

In this manner, the second region 180905 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 can be formed, which corresponds to the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903. The (p + 1) th image 180902 which is an intermediate state between the (p + 2) th image 180903 and the p-th image 180901 by performing the above-described processing also on other regions in the (p + 2) th image 180903 Can be formed.

FIG. 89B shows the case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (the conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 89 (B) schematically shows a method of detecting the movement of the image with the horizontal axis as time. Period Tin is a period of input image data, image 1809
11 is the p-th image, the image 180912 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180913 is the
The image of +2) and the image 180914 represent the (p + 3) -th image. Also,
In the image, a first region 180915 and a second region 1809 are used as time-independent regions.
16, a third region 180917 and a fourth region 180918 are provided.

First, in the (p + 3) th image 180914, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-like regions, and the image data in the fourth region 180918 which is one of the regions is noted.

Next, in the p-th image 180911, a range larger than the fourth region 180918 centered on the fourth region 180918 is focused. Here, a range larger than the fourth area 180918 centering on the fourth area 180918 is a data search range. The data search range is 180919 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 in the vertical direction (Y direction).
It will be 20. The horizontal range 180919 and the vertical range 180920 of the data search range may be a range obtained by expanding the horizontal range and the vertical range of the fourth region 180918 by about 15 pixels.

Then, in the data search range, a region having image data most similar to the image data in the fourth region 180918 is searched. The search method can use the least squares method or the like. As a region having the most similar image data as a result of the search, the first region 18091 is obtained.
Suppose that 5 is derived.

Next, a vector is derived as a quantity representing the difference in position between the derived first area 180915 and the fourth area 180918. Note that this vector is a motion vector 180921
I will call it.

Then, in the (p + 1) th image 180912 and the (p + 2) th image 180913, a first vector and a second vector obtained from the motion vector 180921, and
The image data in the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914 and the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911 form the second region 180916 and the third region 180917. Form.

Here, the first vector obtained from the motion vector 180921 is referred to as a first displacement vector 18
I will call it 0922. Also, the second vector is referred to as a second displacement vector 180923. The first displacement vector 180922 has a role of determining the position forming the second region 180916. The second region 180916 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the first displacement vector 180922. The first displacement vector 180922 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (1/3). The second displacement vector 180923 also has a role of determining the position where the third region 180917 is formed. The third area 180917 is formed at a position separated from the fourth area 180918 by the second displacement vector 180923. The second displacement vector 180923
May be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (2/3).

The image data in the second region 180916 in the (p + 1) th image 180912 is the image data in the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914;
It may be determined by the image data in the first area 180915 in the image 180911 of For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180912
The image data in the 16th is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) th image 180914.
The average value of the image data in No. 8 and the image data in the first area 180915 in the p-th image 180911 may be used.

The image data in the third region 180917 in the (p + 2) th image 180913 includes the image data in the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914, and
It may be determined by the image data in the first area 180915 in the image 180911 of For example, the third region 1809 in the (p + 2) th image 180913
The image data in the seventeenth region is the fourth region 18091 in the (p + 3) th image 180914.
The average value of the image data in No. 8 and the image data in the first area 180915 in the p-th image 180911 may be used.

Thus, the second region 180916 in the (p + 1) th image 180902, corresponding to the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914, and
A third region 180917 in the p + 2) image 180913 can be formed.
Note that by performing the above-described processing on another region in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image 180911 can be obtained.
An image 180912 of p + 1) and an image 180913 of (p + 2) can be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, an example of a circuit that detects the movement of an image included in input image data and creates an intermediate state image will be described. FIG. 90A illustrates a connection between a source driver for displaying an image in a display region, a peripheral driver circuit including a gate driver, and a control circuit for controlling the peripheral driver circuit. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the control circuit. FIG. 90C is a diagram showing an example of a detailed circuit configuration of an image processing circuit included in the control circuit. FIG. 90D is a diagram illustrating another example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit.

As in FIG. 90A, the device in this embodiment may include a control circuit 181011, a source driver 181012, a gate driver 181013, and a display region 181014.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181
013 may be formed on the same substrate as the display region 181014 is formed.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181
013 is partially formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed, and the other circuits are formed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed. It may be For example, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 may be formed on the same substrate as the display region 181014, and the control circuit 18101 may be formed as an external IC on a different substrate. Similarly, the gate driver 181013 may be formed on the same substrate as the display region 181014, and the other circuits may be formed as an external IC on a different substrate. Similarly, the source driver 181012, the gate driver 181013, and a part of the control circuit 181011 are formed on the same substrate as the display region 181014, and the other circuits are formed as external ICs on different substrates. It may be done.

The control circuit 181011 includes an external image signal 181000 and a horizontal synchronization signal 181001.
The vertical synchronization signal 181002 is input, and the image signal 181003, the source start pulse 181004, the source clock 181005, and the gate start pulse 18100.
6 and the gate clock 181007 may be output.

The source driver 181012 includes an image signal 181003 and a source start pulse 181.
It may be configured that the 004 and the source clock 181005 are input, and a voltage or current according to the image signal 181003 is output to the display region 181014.

The gate driver 181013 may be configured to receive the gate start pulse 181006 and the gate clock 181007, and output a signal that specifies the timing for writing the signal output from the source driver 181012 in the display area 181014.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different from each other, a signal for controlling the timing of driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 18101 is also input the horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and the vertical synchronization signal 1810.
It will have a frequency different from 02. Therefore, in addition to the processing of the image signal 181003, it is also necessary to process a signal for controlling the timing of driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013. The control circuit 181011 may be a circuit having a function therefor. For example, when the frequency of the image signal 181003 is doubled with respect to the frequency of the external image signal 181000, the control circuit 181011 determines that the external image signal 18 is
Image signals included in 1000 are interpolated to generate an image signal 181003 of double frequency, and a signal for controlling timing is also controlled to be double frequency.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90B, the control circuit 181011 includes an image processing circuit 181015, and
And a timing generation circuit 181016.

The image processing circuit 181015 includes an external image signal 181000 and a frequency control signal 18100.
8 may be input, and the image signal 181003 may be output.

The timing generation circuit 181016 includes a horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and a vertical synchronization signal 181.
, And the source start pulse 181004 and the source clock 1810
05, a gate start pulse 181006, a gate clock 181007, and a frequency control signal 181008 may be output. Timing generation circuit 181016 may include a memory, a register, or the like that holds data for specifying the state of frequency control signal 181008. Further, timing generation circuit 181016 may be configured to receive a signal specifying the state of frequency control signal 181008 from the outside.

As illustrated in FIG. 90C, the image processing circuit 181015 includes a motion detection circuit 181020, a first memory 181021, a second memory 181022, a third memory 181023, a luminance control circuit 181024, and high-speed processing. And a circuit 181025.

The motion detection circuit 181020 may be configured to receive a plurality of image data, detect a motion of the image, and output image data in an intermediate state of the plurality of image data.

The first memory 181021 receives the external image signal 181000 and holds the external image signal 181000 for a certain period, while the motion detection circuit 181020 and the second memory 1810
22 may be configured to output the external image signal 181000.

The second memory 181022 is configured to receive the image data output from the first memory 181021 and output the image data to the motion detection circuit 181020 and the high-speed processing circuit 181025 while holding the image data for a certain period. It may be.

The third memory 181023 may be configured to receive the image data output from the motion detection circuit 181020 and output the image data to the luminance control circuit 181024 while holding the image data for a certain period.

The high-speed processing circuit 181025 includes the image data output from the second memory 181022;
The image data output from the luminance control circuit 181024 and the frequency control signal 181008 may be input, and the image data may be output as an image signal 181003.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the image processing circuit 181015 may generate an image signal 181003 by interpolating the image signal included in the external image signal 181000. Input external image signal 18100
0 is temporarily held in the first memory 181021. At that time, the second memory 18102
2 holds image data input in the previous frame. Motion detection circuit 18
1020 appropriately reads the image data held in the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022, detects a motion vector from the difference between the two image data, and
Intermediate state image data may be generated. The generated intermediate state image data is held by the third memory 181023.

When the motion detection circuit 181020 generates intermediate state image data, the high speed processing circuit 1
Reference numeral 81025 denotes an image signal 18 for the image data held in the second memory 181022.
Output as 1003. After that, the image data held in the third memory 181023 is output as an image signal 181003 through the luminance control circuit 181024. At this time, the frequency at which the second memory 181022 and the third memory 181023 are updated is the same as the frequency of the external image signal 181000, but the frequency of the image signal 181003 output through the high speed processing circuit 181025 is the frequency of the external image signal 181000. It may be different from the frequency. Specifically, for example, the frequency of the image signal 181003 is the external image signal 181000.
1.5 times, 2 times and 3 times the frequency of However, the frequency is not limited to this and various frequencies can be used. The frequency of the image signal 181003 may be designated by the frequency control signal 181008.

The configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. 90D is obtained by adding a fourth memory 181026 to the configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. 90C. Thus, the image data output from the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022
The image data output from the fourth memory 181026 is also output to the motion detection circuit 181020 in addition to the image data output from the second memory 181026, so that the motion of the image can be accurately detected.

When the input image data already includes a motion vector for data compression etc., for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Gr)
In the case of image data based on the oup) standard, an intermediate state image may be generated as an interpolated image using this. At this time, a portion for generating a motion vector, which is included in the motion detection circuit 181020, becomes unnecessary. In addition, since the encoding and decoding processes relating to the image signal 181003 can be simplified, power consumption can be reduced.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Or, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be constructed by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of this embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can do it freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 11)

In the present embodiment, an example of the electronic device will be described.

FIG. 47 shows a display panel module in which a display panel 900101 and a circuit board 900111 are combined. The display panel 900101 includes a pixel portion 900102, a scan line driver circuit 900103, and a signal line driver circuit 900104. For example, a control circuit 900112, a signal division circuit 900113, and the like are formed on the circuit board 900111. The display panel 900101 and the circuit substrate 900111 are connected by connection wiring 900114. An FPC or the like can be used for the connection wiring.

In the display panel 900101, a pixel portion 900102 and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a drive circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of drive circuits) are integrally formed on a substrate using a transistor, and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a plurality of peripheral drive circuits Among the drive circuits, a drive circuit with a high operating frequency is formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is a display panel 9001 with COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
It may be implemented on 01. By this, the area of the circuit substrate 900111 can be reduced, and a small display device can be obtained. Or, TAB the IC chip (Tape Aut
o Bonding) or a printed circuit board may be used to mount the display panel 900101. By this, the area of the display panel 900101 can be reduced, so that a display device with a small frame size can be obtained.

For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion is formed using a transistor on a glass substrate, all peripheral driving circuits are formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or TAB. May be

A television receiver can be completed by the display panel module shown in FIG. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of a television receiver. Tuner 900201
Receives video and audio signals. The video signal includes a video signal amplifier circuit 900202, a video signal processing circuit 900203 that converts the signal output from the video signal amplifier circuit 900202 into color signals corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and a drive circuit for the video signal. Is processed by the control circuit 900212 for converting into the input specification of Control circuit 900212
Outputs signals to the scanning line side and the signal line side, respectively. In the case of digital driving, a signal dividing circuit 900213 may be provided on the signal line side, and an input digital signal may be divided into m (m is a positive integer) and supplied.

Of the signals received by the tuner 900201, an audio signal is an audio signal amplifier circuit 900205.
, And the output thereof is supplied to the speaker 900207 through the audio signal processing circuit 900206. The control circuit 900208 inputs the control information of the receiving station (reception frequency) and the volume.
0209, and sends a signal to the tuner 900201 or the audio signal processing circuit 900206.

A television receiver incorporating a display panel module different from that of FIG. 48 is shown in FIG.
Shown in A). In FIG. 49A, a display screen 9003 accommodated in a housing 900301.
02 is formed by a display panel module. Note that the speaker 900303, the operation switch 900304, the input unit 900305, and the sensor 900306 (force, displacement, position, speed,
Acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field,
A current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor, or a function of measuring infrared rays), a microphone 900307, and the like may be provided as appropriate.

FIG. 49B shows a television receiver which can wirelessly carry only a display.
A battery and a signal receiver are housed in a housing 900312, and the battery includes a display portion 900313, a speaker portion 900317, and a sensor 900319 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, (Including magnetic, temperature, chemical, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell, infrared or the like) and the microphone 900320. Battery charger 90
Repetitive charging is possible at 0310. The charger 900310 can transmit and receive video signals, and can transmit the video signals to a signal receiver of the display. The device illustrated in FIG. 49B is controlled by the operation key 900316. Or Figure 49.
In the device shown in (B), the charger 90031 is operated by operating the operation key 900316.
It is possible to signal 0. That is, it may be a video and audio two-way communication device. Alternatively, the device illustrated in FIG. 49B transmits a signal to the charger 900310 by operating the operation key 900316 and causes another electronic device to receive a signal that can be transmitted by the charger 900310. Communication control of the electronic device is also possible. That is, it may be a general purpose remote control device. In addition, the input means 900318 etc. may be provided suitably. Note that the contents described in each drawing of this embodiment (or a part of it) may be displayed in display portion 900313.
It can be applied to

FIG. 50A shows a module in which the display panel 900401 and the printed wiring board 900402 are combined. The display panel 900401 includes a pixel portion 900403 in which a plurality of pixels are provided, a first scan line driver circuit 900404, and a second scan line driver circuit 90040.
5 and a signal line driver circuit 900406 which supplies a video signal to a selected pixel.

The printed wiring board 900402 includes a controller 900407 and a central processing unit (CPU
) 900408, memory 900409, power supply circuit 900410, audio processing circuit 90041).
And the transmission / reception circuit 900412. The printed wiring board 900402 and the display panel 900401 are connected by a flexible wiring board (FPC) 900413. A flexible printed circuit (FPC) 900413 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like to prevent generation of noise in a power supply voltage or a signal and an increase in rise time of the signal. Note that the controller 900407, the audio processing circuit 900411, the memory 900409, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410, and the like are
The display panel 900401 can also be mounted using a COG (Chip On Glass) method. By the COG method, the size of the printed wiring board 900402 can be reduced.

An interface (I / F) unit 900414 provided on the printed wiring board 900402
Input and output of various control signals. Then, an antenna port 900415 for transmitting and receiving a signal to and from the antenna is provided in the printed wiring board 900402.

FIG. 50 (B) shows a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. 50 (A). This module includes, as a memory 900409, a VRAM 900416, a DRAM 900417, a flash memory 900418, and the like. Data of an image to be displayed on the panel is stored in the VRAM 900416, image data or audio data is stored in the DRAM 900417, and various programs are stored in the flash memory.

The power supply circuit 900410 supplies power for operating the display panel 900401, the controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the audio processing circuit 900411, the memory 900409, and the transmitting and receiving circuit 900412. However, depending on the specification of the panel, the power supply circuit 900410 may be provided with a current source.

A central processing unit (CPU) 900408 includes a control signal generation circuit 900420 and a decoder 90.
It has an interface (I / F) unit 900419 for the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, and the like. Central processing unit (CPU) via interface (I / F) unit 900419
The various signals input to 900408 are temporarily stored in the register 900422, and then input to the arithmetic circuit 900423, the decoder 900421, and the like. The arithmetic circuit 900423 performs an operation based on the input signal, and specifies a place to which various instructions are sent. While decoder 9
The signal input to 00421 is decoded and input to the control signal generation circuit 900420. The control signal generation circuit 900420 generates a signal including various instructions based on the input signal, and a place designated by the arithmetic circuit 900423, specifically, the memory 900409,
The signal is sent to the transmission / reception circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, the controller 900407, and the like.

Memory 900409, transmission / reception circuit 900412, audio processing circuit 900411, and controller 900407 operate in accordance with the received instructions. The operation will be briefly described below.

A signal input from the input unit 900425 has an interface (I / F) unit 90041.
A central processing unit (CPU) 9004 mounted on the printed wiring board 900402 via
Sent to 08. The control signal generation circuit 900420 converts the image data stored in the VRAM 900416 into a predetermined format according to a signal sent from the input unit 900425 such as a pointing device or a keyboard, and sends the converted data to the controller 900407.

The controller 900407 has a central processing unit (CPU) 9004 in accordance with panel specifications.
Data processing is applied to the signal including the image data sent from 08, and the display panel 90040
Supply to 1. The controller 900407 performs Hs based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 900410 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408.
A ync signal, a Vsync signal, a clock signal CLK, an alternating voltage (AC Cont), and a switching signal L / R are generated and supplied to the display panel 900401.

In the transmitting and receiving circuit 900412, a signal transmitted and received as a radio wave is processed in the antenna 900428. Specifically, an isolator, a band pass filter, a VCO (Volt (Vot)
age Controlled Oscillator), LPF (Low Pass)
High frequency circuits such as a filter, a coupler, and a balun. Transmission / reception circuit 90
Among the signals transmitted and received in 0412, the signal including audio information is a central processing unit (CPU
And the voice processing circuit 900411 according to the instruction from 900408).

A signal including audio information sent according to an instruction of the central processing unit (CPU) 900408 is demodulated into an audio signal in an audio processing circuit 900411 and sent to a speaker 900427. The audio signal sent from the microphone 900426 is modulated in the audio processing circuit 900411, and the transmitting / receiving circuit 9 is instructed in accordance with an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 900408.
It is sent to 00412.

Controller 900407, central processing unit (CPU) 900408, power supply circuit 90041
0, the audio processing circuit 900411, and the memory 900409 can be mounted as a package of this embodiment.

Of course, the present embodiment is not limited to a television receiver, and is used as a display medium for a personal computer, an information display board at a railway station or airport, an advertisement display board at a street, etc. It can apply.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, a configuration example of a mobile phone will be described.

The display panel 900501 is detachably incorporated in the housing 900530. The shape or size of the housing 900530 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 900501. A housing 900530 to which the display panel 900501 is fixed is inserted into a printed circuit board 900531 and assembled as a module.

The display panel 900501 is connected to the printed substrate 900531 through the FPC 900513. The printed circuit board 900531 includes a speaker 900532 and a microphone 900.
533, a transmission / reception circuit 900534, a signal processing circuit 900 including a CPU, a controller, and the like
535 and sensors 900 541 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, It has a function to measure humidity, inclination, vibration, smell or infrared). Such a module, an input unit 900536, and a battery 900537 are combined and stored in a housing 900539. A pixel portion of the display panel 900501 is a housing 900539.
It arranges so that it may be visible from the opening window formed in.

In the display panel 900501, a pixel portion and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a drive circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of drive circuits) are integrally formed on a substrate using a transistor, and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a plurality of drive circuits). Driver circuit with high operating frequency) is formed on the IC chip, and the IC
The chip may be mounted on the display panel 900501 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. With such a configuration, power consumption of the display device can be reduced, and the usage time per charge of the mobile phone can be extended. Cost reduction of the mobile phone can be achieved.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 51 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on a display unit. It has a function of operating or editing the information displayed on the display unit. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. The wireless communication function is used to make a call to another mobile phone, fixed telephone or voice communication device. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. The wireless communication function is used to transmit or receive various data. The vibrator has a function of operating in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. It has a function of generating a sound in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. In addition, the function which the mobile telephone shown in FIG. 51 has is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

The mobile phone illustrated in FIG. 52 includes operation switches 900604 and a microphone 900605.
And the like, a main body (A) 900601, a display panel (A) 900608, a display panel (B) 900609, a speaker 900606, a sensor 900611 (force, displacement, position,
Velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness,
A main body (B) 900602 provided with an electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell or infrared rays), input means 900612, etc. is opened and closed by a hinge 900610 It is linked possible. The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in a housing 900603 of a main body (B) 900602 together with the circuit board 900607. Display panel (A) 900608 and display panel (B
The pixel portion 900609 is arranged so as to be visible from an opening window formed in the housing 900603.

The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609 are connected to the mobile phone 90.
Specifications such as the number of pixels can be set as appropriate in accordance with the function of 0600. For example, the display panel (A) 900608 can be combined as a main screen and the display panel (B) 900609 can be combined as a sub screen.

The mobile phone according to the present embodiment can be changed into various modes according to the function or application. For example, an imaging element may be incorporated in the hinge 900610 to make a mobile phone with a camera. Even when the operation switches 900604, the display panel (A) 900608, and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in one case, the above-described effects can be obtained. Even if the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to an information display terminal provided with a plurality of display units, similar effects can be obtained.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 52 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on a display unit. It has a function of operating or editing the information displayed on the display unit. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. The wireless communication function is used to make a call to another mobile phone, fixed telephone or voice communication device. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. The wireless communication function is used to transmit or receive various data. The vibrator has a function of operating in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. It has a function of generating a sound in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. In addition, the function which the mobile telephone shown in FIG. 52 has is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

The contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, the present invention can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. As such electronic devices, video cameras, digital cameras, goggle type displays, navigation systems, sound reproduction devices (car audios, audio components, etc.), computers, game machines, portable information terminals (mobile computers, mobile phones, portable games, etc.) Machine or electronic book etc)
, An image reproduction apparatus provided with a recording medium (specifically, Digital Versatile D
An apparatus provided with a display capable of reproducing a recording medium such as isc (DVD) and displaying the image, and the like.

FIG. 53A illustrates a display, which includes a housing 900711, a support 900712, and a display portion 9.
3, input means 900714, sensor 900715 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, Radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor, or infrared rays)), microphone 900716, speaker 900717, operation key 900718
, LED lamp 900719 and the like. The display illustrated in FIG. 53A has a function of displaying various information (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion. Note that FIG.
The function which the display shown to A) has is not limited to this, It can have various functions.

FIG. 53B shows a camera, which is a main body 900731, a display portion 900732, an image receiving portion 9007.
33, operation key 900734, external connection port 900735, shutter 900736,
Input means 900737, sensor 900738 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity,
Measuring speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell or infrared ray , Microphone 900739, speaker 900740, LED lamp 900741 and the like. The camera illustrated in FIG. 53B has a function of capturing a still image. It has a function to shoot video. It has a function to automatically correct a captured image (still image, moving image). It has a function of storing a captured image in a recording medium (external or internal to a digital camera). It has a function of displaying a photographed image on a display unit. Note that the function of the camera illustrated in FIG. 53B is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 53C illustrates a computer, which includes a main body 900751, a housing 900752, and a display portion 90.
0753, keyboard 900754, external connection port 900755, pointing device 900756, input means 900757, sensor 900758 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, Time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell, or the function of measuring infrared rays), microphone 900759, speaker 900760, LED lamp 9
And the reader / writer 900762 and the like. The computer illustrated in FIG. 53C has a function of displaying various information (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a communication function such as wireless communication or wired communication. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a communication function. It has a function of transmitting and receiving various data using a communication function. Note that functions of the computer illustrated in FIG. 53C are not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 54A shows a mobile computer, which has a main body 901411, a display portion 901412, and the like.
Switch 901413, operation key 901414, infrared port 901415, input means 9
01416, sensor 901417 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation,
(Including a function of measuring flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor or infrared light), microphone 901418, speaker 901419, LED lamp 901420 and the like. Figure 54 (
The mobile computer shown in A) has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit. The display unit has a touch panel function. The display unit has a function of displaying a calendar, date, time, and the like. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. The wireless communication function is used to transmit or receive various data. Note that functions of the mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 54A are not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 54B shows a portable image reproducing apparatus (for example, a DVD reproducing apparatus) provided with a recording medium, which includes a main body 901431, a housing 901432, a display portion A 901433, and a display portion B 9014.
34, recording medium reading unit 901435 (such as DVD), operation keys 901436, speaker unit 901437, input unit 901438, sensor 901439 (force, displacement, position, speed,
Acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field,
Current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor, or a function of measuring infrared rays), a microphone 901440, an LED lamp 901441, and the like. The display portion A 901433 mainly displays image information, and the display portion B 901 434 can mainly display text information.

FIG. 54C shows a goggle type display, which includes a main body 901451 and a display portion 901452.
, Earphone 901453, support portion 901454, input unit 901455, sensor 9014
56 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow, humidity, inclination (Including the function of measuring vibration, smell or infrared), microphone 901457, speaker 9
[01458] and the like. The goggle type display shown in FIG. 54C has a function of displaying an image (a still image, a moving image, a text image or the like) acquired from the outside on a display portion. Note that FIG.
The function which the goggle type display shown to 4 (C) has is not limited to this, It can have various functions.

FIG. 55A shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 901511, a display portion 901512, a speaker portion 901513, operation keys 901514, a storage medium insertion portion 901515, and input means 901.
516, sensor 901517 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance,
Light, liquid, magnetic, temperature, chemical, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell, infrared, etc.), microphone 9
01518, LED lamp 901519, etc. are included. The portable game machine shown in FIG.
It has a function of reading out the program or data recorded on the recording medium and displaying it on the display unit. It has a function of performing wireless communication with another portable game machine to share information. Note that FIG.
The function of the portable game machine shown in (A) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

55B shows a digital camera with a television receiver function, and a main body 901531 and a display portion 9
01523, operation key 901533, speaker 901534, shutter 901535,
Image reception unit 901536, antenna 901537, input unit 901538, sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation number, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, Voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor, or a function to measure infrared rays) 901539, a microphone 901540, an LED lamp 901541, and the like. The digital camera with a television receiver illustrated in FIG. 55B has a function of capturing a still image. It has a function to shoot video. It has a function to automatically correct the captured image. It has a function of acquiring various information from the antenna. It has a function of storing a photographed image or information acquired from an antenna. It has a function of displaying a photographed image or information acquired from an antenna on a display portion. Note that the digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 53H has a variety of functions without limitation to the above.

FIG. 56 shows a portable game machine, and a housing 901611, a first display portion 901612, a second display portion 901613, a speaker portion 901614, an operation key 901615, and a recording medium insertion portion 901.
616, input means 901617, sensor 901618 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration,
Includes functions to measure angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow, humidity, inclination, vibration, odor or infrared light Microphone), an LED lamp 901620 and the like. The portable game machine shown in FIG. 56 has a function of reading out a program or data recorded in a recording medium and displaying the same on a display portion. It has a function of performing wireless communication with another portable game machine to share information. The portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 56 can have various functions without limitation to the above.

53 (A) to (C), 54 (A) to (C), 55 (A) to (C), and FIG.
As shown in 6, the electronic device is characterized by having a display unit for displaying some information. The electronic device can obtain a display with improved viewing angle characteristics.

Next, application examples of the semiconductor device will be described.

FIG. 73 shows an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with a building. FIG. 73 shows the case 9
It includes a display unit 900811, a remote control device 900812 which is an operation unit, a speaker unit 900813 and the like. The semiconductor device is integrated with a building as a wall-mount type, and can be installed without requiring a large installation space.

FIG. 74 shows another example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the structure in the structure. The display panel 900901 is attached integrally with the unit bus 900902, and a bather can view the display panel 900901. The display panel 900901 has a function of displaying information when operated by a bather. It has a function that can be used as an advertisement or entertainment means.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only on the side wall of the unit bus 900902 shown in FIG. 74 but also on various places. For example, it may be integrated with part of the mirror surface or the bathtub itself. At this time, the shape of the display panel 900901 may be adjusted to the shape of a mirror surface or a bath.

FIG. 77 shows another example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with a structure. Display panel 9
01002 is attached to be curved according to the curved surface of the columnar body 901001. Here, the columnar body 901001 will be described as a utility pole.

A display panel 901002 shown in FIG. 77 is provided at a position higher than the human viewpoint. By installing the display panel 901002 on a structure which is repeatedly forested outdoors like a telephone pole, an advertisement can be provided to an unspecified number of viewers. Here, the display panel 901002
Since it is easy to display the same image and to switch images instantaneously under external control, it is possible to expect extremely efficient information display and advertising effects. Display panel 9
By providing a self-luminous display element in 01002, it can be said that it is useful as a highly visible display medium even at night. By installing the display panel 901002 on a power pole, it is easy to secure a power supply unit of the display panel 901002. In the event of an emergency such as a disaster, it can also be a means to quickly and accurately inform victims.

Note that as the display panel 901002, for example, a display panel can be used which displays an image by providing a switching element such as an organic transistor on a film-like substrate and driving the display element.

In the present embodiment, although a wall, a columnar body, and a unit bus are taken as an example of a structure, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and semiconductor devices can be installed in various structures.

Next, an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the movable body is described.

FIG. 78 is a view showing an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with a car. The display panel 901102 is integrally attached to a car body 901101 of a car, and can display on-demand information input from the operation of the car body or the inside and outside of the car body. In addition, you may have a navigation function.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the vehicle body 901101 shown in FIG. 78 but also in various places. For example, glass windows, doors, handles, shift levers, seat seats,
It may be integrated with a room mirror or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901102 may be in accordance with the shape of the display panel.

FIG. 79 is a view showing an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the train car.

FIG. 79 (a) is a view showing an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on the glass of a door 901201 of a train car. Compared with the conventional paper advertisement, there is an advantage that the labor cost required at the time of advertisement switching is not incurred. The display panel 901202 is capable of instantaneously switching the image displayed on the display portion by a signal from the outside, so, for example, switches the image of the display panel at each time zone when the passenger layer of train passengers You can expect more effective advertising effects.

79 (b) shows a glass window 901203, in addition to the glass of the door 901201 of the train car.
FIG. 16 is a view showing an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on a ceiling 901204. As described above, since the semiconductor device can be easily installed in a place where the installation has been difficult conventionally, an effective advertising effect can be obtained. The semiconductor device can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit by a signal from the outside, so cost and time at the time of advertisement switching can be reduced, and more flexible advertisement operation and information transmission can be performed. It becomes possible.

The semiconductor device can be installed not only in the door 901201, the glass window 901203, and the ceiling 901204 shown in FIG. 79, but also in various places. For example, straps,
It may be integrated with a seat, table, floor or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901202 may be in accordance with the shape of the display panel.

FIG. 80 is a view showing an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the passenger plane.

Fig. 80 (a) shows the display panel 901302 on the ceiling 901301 at the top of the seat of the passenger plane.
It is the figure shown about the shape at the time of use when provided. The display panel 901302 is integrally attached via the ceiling 901301 and the hinge portion 901303, and the hinge portion 9
The expansion and contraction of 01303 enables the passenger to view the display panel 901302. The display panel 901302 has a function of displaying information when operated by a passenger. It has a function that can be used as an advertisement or entertainment means. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the hinge portion is bent to form a ceiling 9
By storing in 01301, safety in take-off and landing can be taken into consideration. In addition, by lighting the display element of a display panel at the time of emergency, it can utilize also as an information transmission means and a guidance lamp.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the ceiling 901301 shown in FIG. 80 but also in various places. For example, it may be integrated with a seat, a seat table, an armrest, a window or the like. A large display panel that many people can view simultaneously may be installed on the wall of the machine. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901302 may be in accordance with the shape of the display panel.

In the present embodiment, the moving body is exemplified by a train car body, an automobile body, and an airplane body, but the invention is not limited thereto, and a motorcycle, a four-wheel automobile (including a car, a bus, etc.)
It can be installed on various things such as trains (including monorails and railways), ships, etc. The semiconductor device can instantaneously switch the display of the display panel in the moving body by a signal from the outside. Therefore, by installing the semiconductor device on the moving body, the moving body can be targeted at an unspecified number of customers. It can be used for applications such as advertising display boards, information display boards in the event of a disaster, etc.

Note that although the present embodiment has been described using various figures, the contents described in each figure (
Some parts may be applied to, or combined with, the contents described in another figure (or some parts).
Or, replacement can be freely performed. Furthermore, in the figures described above, more figures can be constructed by combining other parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the contents (or a part) described in each figure of this embodiment can be applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can do it freely. Furthermore, in the drawings of the present embodiment, more parts can be configured by combining the parts of the other embodiments with respect to the respective parts.

Note that this embodiment is an example in the case of embodying the contents (may be a part) described in the other embodiments, an example in the case of slight modification, an example in the case of changing a part, an improvement An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of the relevant part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

100 gradation signal 101 gradation data conversion unit 102 driving unit 103 display unit 104 gradation data storage unit 105 sub gradation signal 106 combination data 107 control signal 201 first combination data 202 second combination data 301 source driver 302 gate Driver 303 Wiring 304 Wiring 305 Pixel 313 Wiring 400 Sub-pixel A
401 switch 402 capacitive element 403 liquid crystal element 410 sub-pixel B
411 switch 412 capacitor element 413 liquid crystal element 501 sub gray scale signal A
502 Sub gradation signal B
505 pixel 603 liquid crystal element 1201 first combination data 1202 second combination data 1501 shift register 1601 first combination data 1602 second combination data 1603 third combination data 1800 display portion 1801 region 1802 region 2000 display portion 2001 gate Driver 2002 Source driver 2201 Shift register 2202 Level shifter 2203 Sampling circuit 2301 Shift register 2302 Level shifter 2303 Layer 2601 Substrate 2602 Substrate 2602 Substrate 2603 Layer 2605 Layer 2605 Electrode 2606 Electrode 2606 Projection 2608 Protrusions 2650 Insulating layer 2651 Insulating layer 2801 Electrode 2803 Electrode 2803 2804 electrode 5701 A / D conversion circuit 5702 digital signal 5801 D / A conversion circuit 5802 Analog signal 5901 Substrate 5902 Insulating film 5903 Insulating film 5904 Insulating film 5906 Semiconductor layer 5906 Conducting layer 5908 Insulating film 5909 Insulating film 5909 Conductive layer 5910 Alignment film 5912 Alignment film 5913 Conductive layer 5914 Light shielding film 5915 Color filter 5916 Substrate 5917 spacer 5918 liquid crystal molecule 5921 scan line 5922 video signal line 5923 capacitance line 5924 TFT
5925 pixel electrode 5926 pixel capacity 6001 substrate 6002 insulating film 6003 conductive layer 6004 insulating film 6005 semiconductor layer 6006 semiconductor layer 6007 conductive layer 6008 insulating film 6009 conductive film 6010 alignment film 6012 alignment film 6013 conductive layer 6014 light shielding film 6015 color filter 6016 substrate 6017 Spacer 6018 Liquid crystal molecule 6019 Alignment control projection 6021 Scanning line 6023 Capacitance line 6026 Pixel capacity 6101 Substrate 6102 Insulating film 6103 Conducting layer 6104 Insulating film 6105 Semiconductor layer 6106 Semiconductor layer 6107 Conducting layer 6108 Insulating film 6109 Conducting layer 6110 Alignment film 6112 Alignment film 6113 conductive layer 6114 light shielding film 6115 color filter 6116 substrate 6117 spacer 6118 liquid crystal molecule 6119 portion 6121 scan line 6123 capacitance line 6 126 pixel capacitance 6201 substrate 6202 insulating film 6203 conductive layer 6204 insulating film 6205 semiconductor layer 6206 semiconductor layer 6207 conductive layer 6208 insulating film 6209 conductive layer 6210 alignment film 6212 alignment film 6214 alignment film 6214 light shielding film 6215 color filter 6216 substrate 6217 spacer 6218 liquid crystal molecules 6221 scanning Line 6222 Video Signal Line 6223 Common Electrode 6224 TFT
6225 pixel electrode 6301 substrate 6302 insulating film 6303 conductive layer 6304 insulating film 6305 semiconductor layer 6306 semiconductor layer 6307 conductive layer 6308 insulating film 6309 conductive layer 6310 alignment film 6312 alignment film 6313 conductive layer 6314 light shielding film 6315 color filter 6316 substrate 6317 spacer 6318 liquid crystal Molecule 6319 Insulating film 6321 Scanning line 6322 Video signal line 6323 Common electrode 6324 TFT
6325 pixel electrode 7501 display portion 7502 scanning line 7503 signal line 7504 pixel 7504 A sub pixel A
7504B Sub-pixel B
7701 transmission amount of light of sub-pixel A 7702 transmission amount of light of sub-pixel B total value of transmission amount of light per pixel 2606a electrode 2801a electrode 2801b electrode 2801c electrode 2801d electrode 2802a electrode 2802b electrode 2802c electrode 2802d electrode 2803a electrode 2803b electrode 2803c electrode 2803d electrode 2804a electrode 2804b electrode 2804c electrode 2804d electrode 50100 substrate 50101 pixel portion 50105 substrate 50106 signal line drive circuit 50200 FPC
50501 Insulating film 50502 Semiconductor film 50503 Insulating film 50504 Insulating film 50506 Insulating film 50507 Insulating film 50508 Insulating film 50509 Insulating film 50509 Insulating film 50510 Insulating film 50511 Insulating film 50512 Insulating film 50513 Insulating film 50514 Insulating film 50514 Insulating film 50515 Substrate 50516 Sealing material 50517 Conductive layer 50518 conductive film 50519 transistor 50520 transistor 50521 transistor 50525 drive circuit region 50526 pixel region 50530 IC chip 50531 spacer 50551 protrusion 50601 driver IC
51801 Insulating film 52001 Insulating film 52201 Insulating film 60105 Insulating film 60106 Wiring 60107 Wiring 60108 Transistor 60111 Wiring 60112 Counter electrode 60113 Capacitor 60115 Pixel electrode 60116 Partition 60117 Organic conductor film 60118 Organic thin film 60119 Substrate 6022A Video signal line 6022B Video signal line 6024A TFT
6024B TFT
6025A pixel electrode 6025B pixel electrode 6122A video signal line 6122B video signal line 6124A TFT
6124B TFT
6125A pixel electrode 6125B pixel electrode 50105a scan line drive circuit 50105b scan line drive circuit 50502a semiconductor film 50502b semiconductor film 50508a conductive film 50508b conductive film 50602a driver IC
50602b Driver IC
30102 delay circuit 30103 correction circuit 30104 output image signal 30105 encoder 30106 memory 30107 decoder 30108 LUT
30109 LUT
30110 adder 30111 subtractor 30112 multiplier 30113 adder 30201 transistor 30202 auxiliary capacity 30203 display element 30204 video signal line 30205 scan line 30206 common line 30211 auxiliary capacity 30213 display element 30214 video signal line 30215 scanning line 30216 common line 30217 common Line 30301 Diffusion plate 30302 Cold cathode tube 30311 Diffusion plate 30312 Light source 30401 Broken line 30402 Solid line 30501 Broken line 30101a Input image signal 30101b Input image signal 180101 Display device 180101 Pixel unit 180102 Pixel 180103 Signal line drive circuit 180104 Scanning line drive circuit 180701 Image 180702 Image 180703 Image 180704 180705 Image 180711 Image 180713 Image 180714 Image 180715 Image 180717 Image 180721 Image 180722 Image 180723 Image 180724 Image 180725 Image 180725 Image 180802 Image 180802 Region 180805 Region 180805 Region 180806 Image 180812 Image 180812 Image 180812 Image 180813 Image 180814 Region 180815 Region 180815 180821 image 180822 image 180823 image 180824 area 180825 area 180826 area 180831 image 180832 image 180833 image 180834 area 180834 area 180835 area 180836 area 180841 area 180842 point 180901 image 80902 image 180903 image 180904 area 180905 area 180906 area 180907 area 180909 area 180909 motion vector 180911 image 180912 image 180912 image 180913 area 180916 area 180916 area 180917 area 180918 area 180919 area 180919 area 180920 area 180921 area vector 180922 area vector 180923 area vector 180923 External image signal 181001 Horizontal synchronization signal 181002 Vertical synchronization signal 181003 Image signal 181004 Source start pulse 181005 Source clock 181006 Gate start pulse 181007 Gate clock 181008 Frequency control signal 181011 Control circuit 181012 source driver 181013 gate driver 181014 display area 181015 image processing circuit 181016 timing generation circuit 181020 detection circuit 181021 first memory 181022 second memory 181023 third memory 181024 luminance control circuit 181025 high speed processing circuit 181026 memory 900101 display panel 900102 Portion 900103 Scanning line drive circuit 900104 Signal line drive circuit 900111 Circuit board 900112 Control circuit 900113 Signal division circuit 900114 Connection wiring 900201 Tuner 900202 Video signal amplification circuit 900203 Video signal processing circuit 900205 Audio signal amplification circuit 900206 Audio signal processing circuit 900207 Speaker 900208 Control Circuit 9002 9 input unit 900212 control circuit 900213 signal division circuit 900301 housing 900302 display screen 900303 speaker 900304 operation switch 900305 input means 900306 sensor 900307 microphone 900310 charger 900312 housing 900313 display portion 900316 operation key 900317 speaker portion 900318 input means 900319 sensor 900320 macro Phone 900401 Display panel 900402 Printed wiring board 900403 Pixel portion 900404 Scanning line drive circuit 900405 Scanning line drive circuit 900406 Signal line drive circuit 900407 Controller 900408 Central processing unit (CPU)
900409 memory 900410 power supply circuit 900411 voice processing circuit 900412 transmission / reception circuit 900413 flexible printed circuit (FPC)
900414 interface (I / F) section 900415 antenna port 900416 VRAM
900417 DRAM
900418 flash memory 900419 interface (I / F) unit 900420 control signal generation circuit 900421 decoder 900422 register 900423 arithmetic circuit 900424 RAM
900425 input means 900426 microphone 900427 speaker 900428 antenna 900501 display panel 900513 FPC
900530 housing 900531 printed circuit board 900532 speaker 900533 microphone 900534 transmission / reception circuit 900535 signal processing circuit 900536 input means 900537 battery 900539 housing 900541 sensor 900600 mobile phone 900601 main body (A)
900602 Main unit (B)
900603 Case 900604 Operation switches 900605 Microphone 900606 Speaker 900607 Circuit board 900608 Display panel (A)
900609 Display panel (B)
900610 hinge 900611 sensor 900612 input means 900711 support base 900713 display portion 900714 input means 900715 sensor 900716 microphone 900717 speaker 900718 operation key 900719 main body 900732 display portion 900733 image receiving portion 900734 operation key 900735 external connection port 900736 shutter 900737 input Means 900738 Sensor 900739 Microphone 900740 Speaker 900741 LED lamp 900751 Body 900752 Case 900753 Display 900754 Keyboard 900755 External connection port 900756 Pointing device 900757 Input means 900758 Sensor 900759 Microphone 900760 Speaker 900761 LED lamp 900762 Reader / writer 900810 Housing 900811 Display portion 900812 Remote control device 900813 Speaker portion 900901 Display panel 900902 Unit bus 901001 Column body 901002 Display panel 901101 Car body 901102 Display panel 901201 Door 901202 Display panel 901203 Glass window 901204 Ceiling 901301 Ceiling 901302 Display panel 901303 Hinge part 901411 Body 901412 Display area 901413 Switch 901414 Operation key 901415 Infrared port 901416 Input means 901417 Sensor 901418 Microphone 901419 Speaker 901420 LED lamp 901431 Body 90 432 housing 901,433 display section A
901434 Display B
901435 recording medium reading unit 901436 operation unit 901437 speaker unit 901438 input unit 901439 sensor 901440 LED lamp 901451 main unit 901452 display unit 901453 earphone 901454 support unit 901455 input unit 901456 sensor 901457 microphone 901458 speaker 901511 housing 901512 display unit 901513 speaker unit 901514 Operation key 901515 Storage medium insertion portion 901516 Input means 901517 Sensor 901518 Microphone 901519 Main body 901532 Display portion 901533 Operation key 901534 Speaker 901535 Shutter 901536 Image receiver 901537 Antenna 901 Reference numeral 538 input means 901539 sensor 901540 microphone 901541 LED lamp 901611 housing 901612 display area 901613 display area 901614 speaker area 901615 operation key 901616 recording medium insertion area 901617 input means 901618 sensor 901619 microphone 901620 LED lamp

Claims (3)

A first substrate,
A gate electrode above the first substrate;
A gate insulating film above the gate electrode;
A semiconductor film above the gate insulating film;
A first insulating film above the semiconductor film;
An electrode above the first insulating film,
A second insulating film above the electrode;
A pixel electrode above the second insulating film;
An alignment film above the pixel electrode;
A liquid crystal layer above the alignment film,
And a second substrate above the liquid crystal layer,
The semiconductor film includes In, Ga, and Zn,
The first insulating film has a first contact hole,
The electrode is electrically connected to the semiconductor film through the first contact hole,
The second insulating film has a second contact hole,
The pixel electrode is electrically connected to the electrode via the second contact hole,
A liquid crystal display device having a function of switching the number of frames per second using first and second steps in accordance with light outside the device. A first substrate,
A gate electrode above the first substrate;
A gate insulating film above the gate electrode;
A semiconductor film above the gate insulating film;
A first insulating film above the semiconductor film;
An electrode above the first insulating film,
A second insulating film above the electrode;
A pixel electrode above the second insulating film;
An alignment film above the pixel electrode;
A liquid crystal layer above the alignment film,
And a second substrate above the liquid crystal layer,
The gate insulating film has a laminated structure,
The gate insulating film has a first film,
The first film contains oxygen and silicon,
The first film has a region in contact with the semiconductor film,
The first insulating film includes oxygen and silicon,
The semiconductor film includes In, Ga, and Zn,
The first insulating film has a first contact hole,
The electrode is electrically connected to the semiconductor film through the first contact hole,
The second insulating film has a second film and a third film above the second film,
The second film contains oxygen and silicon,
The third film comprises an organic material,
The second insulating film has a second contact hole,
The pixel electrode has an opening.
The pixel electrode is electrically connected to the electrode via the second contact hole,
A liquid crystal display device having a function of switching the number of frames per second using first and second steps in accordance with light outside the device. A first substrate,
A transistor above the first substrate;
A first insulating film above the transistor;
A pixel electrode above the first insulating film;
An alignment film above the pixel electrode;
A liquid crystal layer above the alignment film,
And a second substrate above the liquid crystal layer,
The transistor has a semiconductor film including a channel formation region,
The semiconductor film includes In, Ga, and Zn,
The first insulating film has a contact hole,
The pixel electrode is electrically connected to the source or drain of the transistor through the contact hole.
A liquid crystal display device having a function of switching the number of frames per second using first and second steps in accordance with light outside the device.

Images